50212035 Revit 2010 Imperial Tutorial | Autodesk Revit | Building Information Modeling

Revit MEP 2010

Imperial Tutorial

March 2009

©

2009 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Except as otherwise permitted by Autodesk, Inc., this publication, or parts thereof, may not be reproduced in any form, by any method, for any purpose. Certain materials included in this publication are reprinted with the permission of the copyright holder. Disclaimer THIS PUBLICATION AND THE INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IS MADE AVAILABLE BY AUTODESK, INC. "AS IS." AUTODESK, INC. DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE REGARDING THESE MATERIALS. Trademarks The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., in the USA and other countries: 3DEC (design/logo), 3December, 3December.com, 3ds Max, ADI, Alias, Alias (swirl design/logo), AliasStudio, Alias|Wavefront (design/logo), ATC, AUGI, AutoCAD, AutoCAD Learning Assistance, AutoCAD LT, AutoCAD Simulator, AutoCAD SQL Extension, AutoCAD SQL Interface, Autodesk, Autodesk Envision, Autodesk Insight, Autodesk Intent, Autodesk Inventor, Autodesk Map, Autodesk MapGuide, Autodesk Streamline, AutoLISP, AutoSnap, AutoSketch, AutoTrack, Backdraft, Built with ObjectARX (logo), Burn, Buzzsaw, CAiCE, Can You Imagine, Character Studio, Cinestream, Civil 3D, Cleaner, Cleaner Central, ClearScale, Colour Warper, Combustion, Communication Specification, Constructware, Content Explorer, Create>what's>Next> (design/logo), Dancing Baby (image), DesignCenter, Design Doctor, Designer's Toolkit, DesignKids, DesignProf, DesignServer, DesignStudio, Design|Studio (design/logo), Design Web Format, Discreet, DWF, DWG, DWG (logo), DWG Extreme, DWG TrueConvert, DWG TrueView, DXF, Ecotect, Exposure, Extending the Design Team, Face Robot, FBX, Filmbox, Fire, Flame, Flint, FMDesktop, Freewheel, Frost, GDX Driver, Gmax, Green Building Studio, Heads-up Design, Heidi, HumanIK, IDEA Server, i-drop, ImageModeler, iMOUT, Incinerator, Inferno, Inventor, Inventor LT, Kaydara, Kaydara (design/logo), Kynapse, Kynogon, LandXplorer, LocationLogic, Lustre, Matchmover, Maya, Mechanical Desktop, Moonbox, MotionBuilder, Movimento, Mudbox, NavisWorks, ObjectARX, ObjectDBX, Open Reality, Opticore, Opticore Opus, PolarSnap, PortfolioWall, Powered with Autodesk Technology, Productstream, ProjectPoint, ProMaterials, RasterDWG, Reactor, RealDWG, Real-time Roto, REALVIZ, Recognize, Render Queue, Retimer,Reveal, Revit, Showcase, ShowMotion, SketchBook, Smoke, Softimage, Softimage|XSI (design/logo), SteeringWheels, Stitcher, Stone, StudioTools, Topobase, Toxik, TrustedDWG, ViewCube, Visual, Visual Construction, Visual Drainage, Visual Landscape, Visual Survey, Visual Toolbox, Visual LISP, Voice Reality, Volo, Vtour, Wire, Wiretap, WiretapCentral, XSI, and XSI (design/logo). The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk Canada Co. in the USA and/or Canada and other countries: Backburner,Multi-Master Editing, River, and Sparks. The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of MoldflowCorp. in the USA and/or other countries: Moldflow, MPA, MPA (design/logo),Moldflow Plastics Advisers, MPI, MPI (design/logo), Moldflow Plastics Insight,MPX, MPX (design/logo), Moldflow Plastics Xpert. Third Party Software Program Credits ACIS Copyright© 1989-2001 Spatial Corp. Portions Copyright© 2002 Autodesk, Inc. Flash ® is a registered trademark of Macromedia, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. International CorrectSpell™ Spelling Correction System© 1995 by Lernout & Hauspie Speech Products, N.V. All rights reserved. InstallShield™ 3.0. Copyright© 1997 InstallShield Software Corporation. All rights reserved. PANTONE® Colors displayed in the software application or in the user documentation may not match PANTONE-identified standards. Consult current PANTONE Color Publications for accurate color. PANTONE Color Data and/or Software shall not be copied onto another disk or into memory unless as part of the execution of this Autodesk software product. Portions Copyright© 1991-1996 Arthur D. Applegate. All rights reserved. Portions of this software are based on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. RAL DESIGN© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 RAL CLASSIC© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 Representation of the RAL Colors is done with the approval of RAL Deutsches Institut für Gütesicherung und Kennzeichnung e.V. (RAL German Institute for Quality Assurance and Certification, re. Assoc.), D-53757 Sankt Augustin. Typefaces from the Bitstream® typeface library copyright 1992. Typefaces from Payne Loving Trust© 1996. All rights reserved. Printed manual and help produced with Idiom WorldServer™. WindowBlinds: DirectSkin™ OCX © Stardock® AnswerWorks 4.0 ©; 1997-2003 WexTech Systems, Inc. Portions of this software © Vantage-Knexys. All rights reserved. The Director General of the Geographic Survey Institute has issued the approval for the coordinates exchange numbered TKY2JGD for Japan Geodetic Datum 2000, also known as technical information No H1-N0.2 of the Geographic Survey Institute, to be installed and used within this software product (Approval No.: 646 issued by GSI, April 8, 2002). Portions of this computer program are copyright © 1995-1999 LizardTech, Inc. All rights reserved. MrSID is protected by U.S. Patent No. 5,710,835. Foreign Patents Pending. Portions of this computer program are Copyright ©; 2000 Earth Resource Mapping, Inc. OSTN97 © Crown Copyright 1997. All rights reserved. OSTN02 © Crown copyright 2002. All rights reserved. OSGM02 © Crown copyright 2002, © Ordnance Survey Ireland, 2002. FME Objects Engine © 2005 SAFE Software. All rights reserved. ETABS is a registered trademark of Computers and Structures, Inc. ETABS © copyright 1984-2005 Computers and Structures, Inc. All rights reserved. RISA is a trademark of RISA Technologies. RISA-3D copyright © 1993-2005 RISA Technologies. All rights reserved.

Portions relating to JPEG © Copyright 1991-1998 Thomas G. Lane. All rights reserved. This software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. Portions relating to TIFF © Copyright 1997-1998 Sam Leffler. © Copyright 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. All rights reserved. The Tiff portions of this software are provided by the copyright holders and contributors “as is” and any express or implied warranties, including, but not limited to, the implied warranties or merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose are disclaimed. In no event shall the copyright owner or contributors of the TIFF portions be liable for any direct, indirect, incidental, special, exemplary, or consequential damages (including, but not limited to, procurement of substitute goods or services; loss of use, data, or profits; or business interruption) however caused and on any theory of liability, whether in contract, strict liability, or tort (including negligence or otherwise) arising in any way out of the use of the TIFF portions of this software, even if advised of the possibility of such damage. Portions of Libtiff 3.5.7 Copyright © 1988-1997 Sam Leffler. Copyright © 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted without fee, provided that (i) the above copyright notices and this permission notice appear in all copies of the software and related documentation, and (ii) the names of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics may not be used in any advertising or publicity relating to the software without the specific, prior written permission of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics. Portions of Libxml2 2.6.4 Copyright © 1998-2003 Daniel Veillard. All Rights Reserved. Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the “Software”), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: The above copyright notices and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. Government Use Use, duplication, or disclosure by the U.S. Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in FAR 12.212 (Commercial Computer Software-Restricted Rights) and DFAR 227.7202 (Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software), as applicable.

Contents

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Chapter 1 Using the Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
What is in the Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Accessing Training Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

Chapter 2

Understanding the Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Understanding the Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Using the Revit MEP User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Parts of the Revit Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Modifying the View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Performing Common Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Chapter 3

Getting Started with MEP Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Creating an MEP Project . . . . . . . . . . Linking Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Applying a View Template . Modifying System Settings . . . . . . . . . Modifying General System Options . Specifying File Locations . . . . . . Specifying Spelling Options . . . . . Modifying Snap Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 . 30 . 34 . 35 . 35 . 36 . 39 . 40

Creating a Mechanical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Preparing Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Placing Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Placing a Space in an Open Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

v

Placing a Multi-Level Space . . . . . . . Viewing Zones in the System Browser . . Creating Zones on a Single Level . . . . Creating Zones on Multiple Levels . . . Working with the Analytical Model . . . Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads . Creating a Zone Color Scheme . . . . . Creating an Airflow Schedule . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. 56 . 59 . 60 . 62 . 64 . 69 . 72 . 75

Chapter 5

Designing Mechanical Air Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Placing Hosted Air Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems . . . . . . . . . Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems . Manually Creating Ductwork . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 . . 85 . . 92 . . 94 . 102

Chapter 6

Designing a Mechanical Piping System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Adding Mechanical Equipment . . Creating a Piping System . . . . . . Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout . . Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout . Adding Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . Sizing Pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inspecting the System . . . . . . . Checking Piping Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 . 114 . 119 . 128 . 142 . 146 . 149 . 151

Creating an Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Specifying Electrical Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 Defining Required Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 Creating Color Fills and Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163

Chapter 8

Designing an Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills . Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures . . . . . . . . . Placing Switches, Junction Boxes, and Receptacles . . . . . Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Switch System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Power Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Balancing Wire Size and Breaker Service . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Panel Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking Your Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 . 177 . 183 . 193 . 200 . 204 . 207 . 211 . 213 . 214

Creating a Plumbing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 Chapter 9 Planning a Plumbing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Configuring a Plumbing and Piping System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

Chapter 10

Designing a Plumbing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 Creating a Sanitary System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235

vi | Contents

Refining the Sanitary Stack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 Creating the Cold Water System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 Creating the Hot Water System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256

Creating a Fire Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265 Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Specifying Pipe Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 Determining Zone Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270

Chapter 12

Designing a Fire Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Adding Sprinklers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Piping System . . . . . . . . . . . Completing the Fire Protection Wet System . Adding Vertical Supply Piping . . . . . . . . Modifying Pipe Diameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279 . 284 . 289 . 294 . 299

Documenting a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305 Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Duplicating Plan Views . . . . . . . . Creating Dependent Views . . . . . . Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser . Creating Callout Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307 . 308 . 311 . 315

Chapter 14

Working with Annotations and Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Creating Annotations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322 Creating Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327 Creating a Legend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329

Chapter 15

Detailing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
Creating a Model-Based Electrical Riser Diagram Detail . Creating Detail Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail . . . . . . . . Drafting Detail Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Importing a CAD Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335 . 338 . 348 . 353 . 364

Contents | vii

viii .

you learn how to create and set up an MEP project. You also learn how to use the Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 user interface to perform common tasks. Finally. 1 . you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to access the tutorial training files.Introduction In this tutorial.

2 .

fixtures. How the tutorials are organized The tutorials are designed to follow the typical mechanical. What is in the Tutorials In these tutorials. Add more detailed modelling elements. such as duct. The Contents tab of the Revit MEP Tutorials window displays the available tutorial titles. Expand a lesson title for a list of exercises in the lesson. The technical training facility you design was a product of a design competition in Munich. Add basic MEP elements. and piping. and plumbing engineering workflows. NOTE You may find it helpful to print a tutorial to make it easier to reference the instructions as you work in Revit MEP. Expand a title for a list of lessons in the tutorial. 3 .Using the Tutorials 1 This lesson provides information on how to get started with the Revit® MEP 2010 tutorials. You complete the following phases of design: ■ ■ ■ Import the architectural floor plan in either a 2D (DWG) or a 3D (RVT) format. you learn how to design a building information model (BIM) in Revit MEP. including an overview of the building information model that you design in the tutorials. such as mechanical equipment. The tutorials are also available in PDF format by clicking Help menu ➤ Documents on the Web in Revit MEP. This building is also used as the model in the Revit® Architecture and Revit® Structure 2010 tutorials. Germany. and where to find the training files required to complete the exercises. electrical. and plumbing fixtures. electrical panels.

The training files include a starting point for each tutorial exercise.■ ■ ■ Analyze systems and refine MEP elements. For example. you learn where the training files are located. When you install the training files as instructed. you only draw the duct in one wing of the building. as well as how to open and save them. The tutorials include a Training File section that references the training file to be used with the tutorial. your Training folder may be in a different location. they are copied to the default location C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RME 2010\Training. Contact your CAD manager for more information. Create detail views. and families that were created specifically for use with the tutorials. views. So. elements such as additional ductwork and equipment are incorporated into subsequent training files. Each training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. After completing each exercise. In this exercise. Metric: files for users working with metric units. Although this content may be installed in other locations on your system. For example. is located and accessed in the training files location. 4 | Chapter 1 Using the Tutorials . Metric file names have an _m suffix. Create schedules. The tutorial exercises are designed to be basic and brief. Training files are grouped into 2 folders within the Training folder: ■ ■ Imperial: files for users working with imperial units. to provide a richer and more finished design. IMPORTANT Content used in the tutorials. and sheets to document the project. On the Contents tab. however. Locate the training files The Tutorials option on the Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 Help menu provides a link to the installation website for the tutorial content and training files. These elements enhance the exercises you complete. Use the training files A training file is a Revit MEP project that defines a building information model and views of the model that are used to complete the steps in a tutorial. Open a training file 1 Click ➤ Open. Accessing Training Files Training files are Revit MEP projects. However. all content used in the tutorials is installed in the training files location to ensure that all audiences access the correct files. but only enough of a system to learn how to use the tools and options in the product. Imperial file names have an _i suffix. you can complete any exercise without first completing the preceding exercises. templates. and tags. NOTE Depending on your installation. it is recommended that you begin each exercise by opening the training provided. the tutorials are grouped and presented in a recommended order for optimal learning. when you add ductwork. annotations. you may notice that MEP elements are included that were not specifically added in an exercise. You do not design entire systems. the exercises and lessons can be completed in any order. you can choose to save your work. such as templates and families. When you open a training file.

A training file is provided as a starting point for each exercise. Save a training file 5 To save a training file with a new name. you should save this file with a new name such as settings_modified. NOTE You are not required to save your work in a training file. double-click Imperial or Metric. and click Open. depending on the instructions in the tutorial. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. scroll down. 3 In the right pane. enter the new file name. For Files of type. You may close the file with or without saving changes.rvt. you are prompted to save the changes. verify that Project Files (*.rvt) is selected. and you can open any supported file type. the Open dialog displays. 4 Click the training file name. ■ ■ Close a training file 7 Click ➤ Close. For example. 6 Complete the information in the Save As dialog: ■ For Save in. You can save the file in the appropriate Training Files folder or in another location. and click the Training Files icon. A good practice is to save the training file with a unique name after you have made changes. a list of file types displays. 8 If you have made changes.NOTE If you click the word Open in the menu. Click a file type to display the Open dialog for the specified file type. select the folder in which to save the new file. if you open settings. If you click the arrow to the right of the Open option. and click Save. For File name. click ➤ Save As.rvt and make changes. Accessing Training Files | 5 .

6 .

the door retains this relationship to the partition. ■ ■ 7 . you learn what Revit MEP is and how its parametric change engine benefits you and your work. These relationships are created either automatically by the software or by you as you work. In this case. sections. the relationship of equal spacing is maintained. and schedule is a presentation of information from the same underlying building model database. and how to perform some common tasks in the product. drawing sheets. the floor or roof remains connected. In mathematics and mechanical CAD. the parameter is one of association or connection. scope. You learn the terminology. In this case. quantities. hence. drawings. every drawing sheet. the operation of the software is parametric. The following are examples of these element relationships: ■ The outside of a door frame is a fixed dimension on the hinge side from a perpendicular partition. Revit MEP collects information about the building project and coordinates this information across all other representations of the project. and phases when you need it. the hierarchy of elements. The Revit MEP parametric change engine automatically coordinates changes made anywhere—in model views. and schedules required for a building project. Building information modelling (BIM) delivers information about project design. The edge of a floor or roof is related to the exterior wall such that when the exterior wall is moved. If you move the partition. the numbers or characteristics that define these kinds of relationships are called parameters. and plans. the parameter is not a number but a proportional characteristic. This capability delivers the fundamental coordination and productivity benefits of Revit MEP: Change anything at any time anywhere in the project. What is meant by parametric? The term parametric refers to the relationships among all elements of the design that enable the coordination and change management that Revit MEP provides. schedules.Understanding the Basics 2 In this lesson. Understanding the Concepts What is Autodesk Revit MEP 2010? The Revit MEP platform for building information modelling is a design and documentation system that supports the design. You begin with the fundamental concepts on which Revit MEP is built. If the length of the elevation is changed. 2D and 3D view. In the Revit MEP model. Windows or pilasters are spaced equally across a given elevation. As you work in drawing and schedule views. and Revit MEP coordinates that change through the entire project.

For example. For example. They display in relevant views of the design. filled regions. The second is its approach to propagating building changes. levels. The first is the capturing of relationships while the designer works. boilers. dimensions. They help to describe or document the design. View-specific elements display only in the views in which they are placed. Revit MEP uses 3 types of elements: ■ Model elements represent the actual 3D geometry of the building. When you change something. sinks. For example. and electrical panels. You do not have to intervene to update drawings or links. sinks. ■ 8 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . For example. and keynotes are annotation elements. Revit MEP immediately determines what is affected by the change and reflects that change to any affected elements. grids. ducts. dimensions. and reference planes are datum elements. Model components are all the other types of elements in the building model. For example. sprinklers. For example. ducts.How does Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 keep things updated? A fundamental characteristic of a building information modelling application is the ability to coordinate changes and maintain consistency at all times. Examples include detail lines. ■ ■ There are 2 types of model elements: ■ Hosts (or host elements) are generally built in place at the construction site. tags. tags. boilers. Datum elements help to define project context. Element behavior in a parametric modeler In projects. and 2D detail components. walls and ceilings are hosts. Details are 2D items that provide details about the building model in a particular view. sprinklers. without requiring entry of data that is unimportant to your design. Revit MEP uses 2 key concepts that make it especially powerful and easy to use. and 2D detail components are view-specific elements. The result of these concepts is software that works like you do. ■ There are 2 types of view-specific elements: ■ Annotation elements are 2D components that document the model and maintain scale on paper. and electrical panels.

from geometry to construction data. Having only one file to track also makes it easier to manage the project. section views. Understanding the Concepts | 9 . and ceilings. and drawings of the design. Revit MEP elements are designed to be created and modified by you directly. for example. and types. you do nothing to establish these relationships. categories of model elements include mechanical equipment and air terminals. Often. you can define new parametric elements in Revit MEP. You create a level for each known story or other needed reference of the building. schedules. they are implied by what you do and how you draw. However. you use levels to define a vertical height or story within a structure. In other cases. top of wall. programming is not required. you add Revit MEP parametric building elements to the design. or bottom of foundation. The project file contains all information for the building design. first floor. For example. North . To place levels. Revit MEP makes it easy for you to alter the design and have changes reflected in all associated areas (plan views. Understanding Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 terms Most of the terms used to identify objects in Revit MEP are common. By using a single project file. you can explicitly control them. and so forth). The context is determined by how you draw the component and the constraint relationships that are established with other components. such as roofs. Most often.Elevation View Element: When creating a project. industry-standard terms familiar to most engineers. This information includes components used to design the model. elevation views. you must be in a section or elevation view. families. Category: A category is a group of elements that you use to model or document a building design. some terms are unique to Revit MEP. floors. by locking a dimension or aligning to walls. views of the project. Level: Levels are infinite horizontal planes that act as a reference for level-hosted elements. Categories of annotation elements include tags and symbols. If you can draw. the project is the single database of information for your design—the building information model. Understanding the following terms is crucial to understanding the software. the elements determine their behavior largely from their context in the structure. Project: In Revit MEP.This implementation provides flexibility for designers. Revit MEP classifies elements by categories. In Revit MEP.

With a few clicks. you can change the interface to better support the way that you work. System families include ducts. You can determine the set of properties and the graphical representation of the family. identical use. you can set the ribbon to one of the three display settings for optimum use of the interface. 10 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . the behavior of a plumbing fitting is predefined in the system. Create an in-place family when your project needs unique geometry that you do not expect to reuse or geometry that must maintain one of more relationships to other project geometry. such as a 30” X 42” title block. and rearranging interface components to support the way that you work. Different elements in a family may have different values for some or all properties. There are 3 kinds of families: ■ Loadable families can be loaded into a project and created from family templates. Type: Each family can have several types. but the set of properties—their names and meaning—is the same. Unlike system and standard component families. you cannot duplicate in-place family types to create multiple types. You can also display several project views at one time. Then experiment with them. Instance: Instances are the actual items (individual elements) that are placed in the project and have specific locations in the design (model instances) or on a drawing sheet (annotation instances). A type can also be a style. and you can place copies of the same in-place family element in your projects. Read the following topics to familiarize yourself with the basic parts of the Revit interface. However. For example. For example. You can use the predefined types to generate new types that belong to this family within the project. showing. Parts of the Revit Interface The Revit MEP interface is designed to simplify your workflow. ■ ■ In-place families are custom families that you create in the context of a project. you can create different types of fittings with different compositions. They are not available for loading or creating as separate files. a lighting fixture could be considered one family. or layer the views to see only the one on top. A family groups elements with a common set of parameters (properties). For example. A type can be a specific size of a family. System families can be transferred between projects. Using the Revit MEP User Interface Revit MEP is a powerful CAD product for the Microsoft® Windows operating system. hiding. Its interface resembles those of other products for Windows featuring a ribbon that contains the tools used to complete tasks. You can create multiple in-place families in your projects. such as default aligned or default angular style for dimensions. each in-place family contains only a single type. although the pendant lights that compose the family come in different sizes and materials. ■ Because in-place families are intended for limited use in a project. ■ ■ ■ Revit MEP predefines the set of properties and the graphical representation of system families. and wires. and similar graphical representation.Family: Families are classes of elements in a category. pipes.

Minimize to Panel Tiles: Shows tab and panel labels. click the Return Panels to Ribbon button. Click the other side to expose a list of other related tools.Ribbon Overview The ribbon displays automatically when you create or open a file. or moving a panel off the ribbon to your desktop. Click a panel label and drag the panel off the ribbon to the desktop. you can click the top (or left) side to access the tool you probably use most often. To return the panel to the ribbon. 2 The minimize behavior cycles through the following minimize options: ■ ■ ■ Show Full Ribbon: Shows entire ribbon. Parts of the Revit Interface | 11 . and provides all the tools necessary to create your file. The ribbon can be minimized for maximum use of the drawing area. or drag the panel back to its original ribbon tab. To move panels: ■ ■ Click a panel label and drag the panel to a desired place on the ribbon. Ribbon Tabs and Panels TIP When you see a button that shows a line dividing it into two sides. To minimize the ribbon 1 Click (Show Full Ribbon) to the right of the ribbon tabs. Customize the ribbon by changing the panel order. Minimize to Tabs: Shows tab labels.

Create (family files only) Insert Annotate Modify Analyze Architect Collaborate View Manage Add-Ins 12 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . data and systems. tools to add and manage secondary items such as raster images. tools used for adding 2D information to a design. many of the tools you need to create the MEP design. and for switching views. and settings. tools used for running analysis on the current design. tools used for managing and modifying the current view.. third-party tools used with Autodesk Revit MEP 2010.Examples of button that can be clicked on two sides The following table describes the ribbon tabs and the types of commands they contain. select the tool first. The Add-Ins tab is enabled only when a third-party tool is installed. project and system parameters.. many of the tools you need to create and modify a family of elements. and CAD files. There are a number of button types on the ribbon Ribbon Tab Home Includes commands for. When working on the Modify tab. tools used for editing existing elements. tools for collaboration with internal and external project team members. architect-specific tools. then select what you want to modify.

a Place Duct contextual tab displays that has three panels: ■ ■ ■ Selection: contains the Modify command. Application Frame Overview The application frame contains tools and provides feedback to help you manage your Revit MEP projects. By default. application button application menu Quick Access toolbar InfoCenter Status Bar Parts of the Revit Interface | 13 .Expanded Panels A drop-down arrow at the bottom of a panel indicates that you can expand the panel to display additional tools and controls. The application frame consists of five main areas described in the following table: Application Window Tool Description opens the application menu (single -click). an expanded panel closes automatically when you click another panel. when adding duct. displays information related to the current state of a Revit operation. displays frequently used tools. provides requested information. a special contextual ribbon tab displays that contains a set of tools that relate only to the context of the command. click the push pin icon in the bottom-left corner of the expanded panel. Placement Tools: contains the placement tools necessary for placing and connecting duct. A dialog-launcher arrow on the bottom of a panel opens a dialog. Contextual Ribbon Tabs When you execute certain commands or select an element. To keep a panel expanded. provides access to common tools. closes the application menu (double-click). Element: contains Element Properties and the Type Selector. This contextual ribbon tab closes once you end the command. For example.

(Save) save the current drawing with a new name. Click to access the application menu and perform the following actions: to... such as Export and Publish.The Application Menu The application menu provides access to many common file actions and also allows you to manage your files using more advanced commands. (Save As) export the current drawing. select a file to open. (New) 14 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . click... select a template and create a new drawing. NOTE Revit MEP options are set from Options on the application menu. Access common tools to start or publish a file in the application menu. (Open) save the current drawing. (Export) On the application menu.

saves a current project. provides views including Default 3D. cancels the last action by default and displays a list of all actions taken during the session. family. Camera. enters selection mode and ends the current operation. (Publish) print the current drawing. (Save) (Undo) (Redo) (Modify) (Synchronize and Modify Settings) (3D View) (Customize Quick Access Toolbar) Parts of the Revit Interface | 15 . NOTE New displays on the Customize Quick Access Toolbar drop-down. reinstates the last cancelled action and displays a list of all reinstated actions performed during the session.. click.. publish the current project. (Close) Using the Quick Access Toolbar The Quick Access toolbar contains the following items by default: Quick Access Toolbar Item (Open) Description opens a project. click next to it on the Customize Quick Access Toolbar drop-down. or template file. annotation. customizes the items displayed on the Quick Access toolbar.. but is not enabled by default.. (Print) access product and license information.On the application menu. family. to. or template file. (Licensing) close the file. and Walkthrough. To enable or disable a tool item. synchronizes a local file with that on the central server. annotation.

While in an edit mode (such as Modify Electrical Fixtures). This displays the command history in a list. NOTE There are some tools on contextual tabs that cannot be added to the Quick Access toolbar. Starting with the most recent command. To hide the Status Bar. items that are added to the Quick Access toolbar from the Create. The Quick Access toolbar can display below the ribbon. Group. when you switch to another editing mode. It often displays tips or hints about what to do next for the current command. workshared components. Click Show Below the Ribbon on the Customize Quick Access Toolbar to change the display setting. or the Family Editor. To show the Status Bar again. click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down. a tool tip appears next to the cursor. Modify. click the drop-down to the right of the Undo and Redo buttons. the left side of the Status Bar provides tips or hints on what to do. Clear the Status Bar check mark. In addition. Status Bar The Status Bar is located along the bottom of the Revit MEP application frame. Active Only: Filters selections to select only active design option components. When you are using a command. Several other controls appear on the right side of the Status Bar ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Press & Drag: Allows you to click and drag an element without it selecting first. these items do not display and need to be re-added to the Quick Access toolbar. However.To undo or redo a series of operations. Clipboard. the Status Bar displays the name of the family and type. Getting Hints About What to Do Next If you start a command (such as Rotate) and are not sure what to do next. you can select any number of previous commands to include in the Undo or Redo operation. check the Status Bar. Editable Only: Filters selections to select only editable. 16 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . When you are highlighting an element or component. repeat the command. Filter button: Displays how many elements are selected and refines the element categories selected in a view. or View Graphics panels persist on the toolbar for that mode. displaying the same information. Exclude Options: Filters selections to exclude components that are part of a design option.

select one or more elements of the same category. Then use the Type Selector to select the desired type. When you place an element in a drawing. View Control Bar The View Control Bar is located at the bottom of the Revit window above the Status Bar. Its contents change depending on the current function or selected elements.To cancel or exit the current command. Its contents change depending on the current command or selected element. use the Type Selector to specify the type of element to add. including the following: Parts of the Revit Interface | 17 . click (Modify). It provides quick access to functions that affect the drawing area. To change existing elements to a different type. Type Selector The Type Selector is located on the Element panel for the currently invoked tool. On the Quick Access toolbar. do either of the following: ■ ■ Press ESC twice. Options Bar The Options Bar is located below the ribbon. for example. Place a Wall.

There are several ways to access zoom options. For example. you may be asked to zoom to a specific region of a view or to zoom to fit the entire structure or floor plan in the view. 1 Click ➤ Open. The 3D isometric view displays: 3 Click Navigation bar ➤ Zoom In Region drop-down to display the zoom menu. 18 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. you are instructed to use a zoom command to adjust the viewable area in the window. click Training Files. Zoom the view In the tutorials. Understanding how to adjust the view will make it easier to work with the MEP design in the window.■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Scale Detail Level Model Graphics Style Shadows On/Off Show/Hide Rendering Dialog (Available only when the drawing area displays a 3D view. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_08_i. you learn how to modify the views within your Revit MEP project. (The Navigation bar is located in the top-right corner of the view. Crop View On/Off Show/Hide Crop Region Temporary Hide/Isolate Reveal Hidden Elements Modifying the View In this exercise. you open a training file and practice adjusting the view with the different zoom commands. After you are familiar with these tasks.rvt.) The zoom menu lists the zoom options. In the following steps. it will be easier to work in Revit MEP and focus on the lessons of each tutorial.

8 If you use a mouse that has a wheel as the middle button. NOTE If the Navigation bar is not currently displayed click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down and select Navigation bar. you can roll the wheel to zoom the view. 9 To display SteeringWheels. 4 Click Zoom Out (2x). In the drawing area. Zoom is also available using SteeringWheels. this is referred to as a crossing selection. When you release the mouse button. To modify or add snap increments. click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Snaps. on the Navigation bar. Use the wheel mouse to zoom out to see the entire structure again. Modifying the View | 19 . If you do not have a wheel mouse. click . NOTE As you zoom in and out. 7 Click the upper left corner and lower right corner of the region to magnify. The view of the MEP design is sized to fit the available window. SteeringWheels provide 2D and 3D navigation tools.NOTE Clicking the Zoom icon itself activates the currently-selected zoom command. the view zooms in on the selected area. 6 Click in the drawing area. The cursor becomes a magnifying glass. use a zoom menu command to zoom out. Revit MEP uses the largest snap increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. the view zooms out from the mechanical piping design. and enter the shortcut ZR to zoom in on a region. 5 Click Zoom To Fit.

click 16 Click the Top compass direction indicator to switch to a Top view of the design. For more information about SteeringWheels. 14 To exit the wheel. ➤ Options. To define settings for SteeringWheels. the wheel follows the cursor around the drawing area. You can change the pivot point by releasing the mouse button. 20 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . moving the wheel to the desired location. Reorient the view You can use the View Cube in 3D views to spin the design or reorient the view 15 Place the mouse cursor over the South compass portion of the ViewCube to highlight the direction indicator. and then using the Zoom tool again. 13 Drag the cursor up or right to zoom in. As you move the mouse. click the SteeringWheels tab. Click and drag to orbit the design. press ESC. 11 Click and hold the mouse button.The Full Navigation wheel displays in the drawing area. The cursor displays a pivot point for the Zoom tool. press F1 while the steering wheel is displayed. 10 Move the cursor over the Zoom wedge of the wheel so that it highlights. 12 Drag the cursor down or left to zoom out. and click tin the Options dialog.

17 Click the Home icon to return to the original view. it is important to understand how to adjust the size of components in the drawing area. Performing Common Tasks In this exercise. you learn to perform some of the common Revit MEP tasks that are included in the tutorials. Similar controls. display at the ends of selected objects in a plan view. When drawing or modifying an MEP design. Resize an element using drag controls 1 In the Project Browser. bottoms.Design ➤ Floor Plans. Performing Common Tasks | 21 . These are the drag controls. Small blue dots. and open Level 2 . as shown. display along the ends. 2 Enter ZR.Design.HVAC Plan . expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . referred to as shape handles. and tops of selected elements in elevation views and 3D views. and select the duct. called drag controls. After you are familiar with these tasks. it will be easier to work in Revit MEP and focus on the lessons of each tutorial. zoom in on the upper-left corner of the floor plan. Notice the small blue dots that display at both ends of the duct.

6 On the Undo menu. click the Undo command. Move an element 7 Select the same duct used in the previous steps. you decide that you prefer to leave the duct as is. The Undo command allows you to reverse the effects of one or more commands.3 Click and drag the bottom control. click the drop-down menu next to (Undo). NOTE To quickly undo the previous action. select the first item in the list. In this example. Undo commands 5 On the Quick Access toolbar. 4 Click in the drawing area to deselect the duct. Selecting the second item in the list will undo the last 2 actions. All commands are canceled up to and including the selected command. Move. 22 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . All changes you make to a project are tracked. on the Standard toolbar. or press CTRL+Z. moving the cursor up to shorten the duct.

require 2 clicks to complete the command. Some commands. 11 With the duct already selected. In this case. you want to move the duct. and click again to specify the ending position. as shown. After selecting the element to move. The duct is moved to the new position. click to specify the starting position. for example. 9 Click the midpoint of the duct. such as Move and Copy. 10 Move the cursor to the right. and drag it to the left as shown. Performing Common Tasks | 23 .8 Click Modify Ducts tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move. Another way to move an element is to select it and drag it to a new location.

Press ESC twice. Notice that the return air duct is not displayed.Return. you can also: ■ ■ Choose another command. Click OK. click the drop-down menu next to supply return air duct. under Visibility: ■ ■ ■ Clear Mechanical . (Undo) to redisplay the 24 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . you can specify visibility settings for specific elements in an HVAC plan in order to enable the display of supply duct and disable the display of return duct. 14 Enter VG. Select Mechanical .Supply. For example. 12 Click Modify tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 13 To end a command. Override the display of objects You can control the visibility of objects in a view to display objects in specific ways. 16 On the Quick Access toolbar. stay active or current until you choose another command or end the current command.End a command Some commands. 15 On the Filters tab of the Visibility/Graphics Override dialog. such as the Modify Ducts command.

17 Close the file without saving your changes. Performing Common Tasks | 25 .

26 .

such as ducts and pipes. Start a project from an existing template 1 Click ➤ New ➤ Project. You can choose from several templates. settings. You can either select a template from the template library. You may need to have a variety of office templates if your work requires it. and click Open.Getting Started with MEP Projects 3 In this lesson you learn how to start a project from a template. In that case. 6 Click OK. you can modify one template and use Transfer Project Standards to copy the changes to the other templates. New projects inherit all the families. under Create new. 2 In the New Project dialog. 4 Select the i_Tutorial-Default. you learn how to organize the project browser to make it easy to view and access your project files. A project template enables you to start a project by providing initial conditions. and modify system settings. system families. 5 In the New Project dialog. and geometry from the starting template. and open Imperial ➤ Templates. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. you learn how to start a project from a template. The template selection may vary depending on your installation. You then learn how to customize the template by modifying the project settings and discipline settings. such as coordination review and interference checking. select Project. The first step in creating your office template is deciding which template to use as your starting point. Creating an MEP Project In this exercise. and loadable families. click Browse. Finally. or you can save a project and use it as a new project template.rte template. click Training files. You also learn how to use collaboration tools. such as the default project units and settings. the default building levels and standard views. create and manage views. 27 . link files. use copy/monitor. under Template file.

For example. Click OK. 16 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Building Type. 9 Close the file with or without saving it.rte template and click Open. Notice that construction template is more complex than the default template and the view properties have been modified to maximize the use of various tools. 18 In the Project Parameters dialog. Modify project settings Project settings control the appearance of components and their subcomponents within a project. for Energy Data. and open North. To maintain office standards and reduce rework. you can select the materials commonly used in most projects. For Location. click (Browse). Click Cancel. expand Views (all) ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation). for City. you can dictate its appearance in all views and when rendered. Click OK twice. NH. 8 In the drawing area. Create a new project template based on the default systems template 12 Click ■ ■ ➤ New ➤ Project. 28 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . select Level 1. you can establish settings that are common to most projects. (Browse). ■ ■ For Ground Plane. 14 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Information. When you select the material. In the Choose Template dialog. click ■ ■ In the Building Construction dialog. select Manchester. and select the Systems-Default_Imperial. ■ For Building Construction. select Project template. In the Manage Place and Locations dialog: ■ On the Place tab. review the construction materials listed. zoom to right side of the drawing area to view the level heads. navigate to Imperial Templates. create another new project using the Construction template. 10 Using the same method. select School or University. select Sub-Discipline and click Modify. If you want to use a template other than the default. Some templates are simple with respect to the predefined views and schedules. TIP This template is the starting point for your new template. you can select it now. 11 Close the file with or without saving it. click Edit. 17 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Parameters.7 In the Project Browser. 15 In the Instance Properties dialog. ■ ■ Under Create new. 13 In the New Project dialog: Under Template file. under Energy Analysis. click Browse.

28 Click Insert tab ➤ Load from Library panel ➤ Load Family. they can be configured in a template file to avoid having to set them for each project. under Duct Settings. Creating an MEP Project | 29 . 33 Click OK. Modify electrical settings Electrical settings determine the voltage. clear the check boxes under the Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing columns. 20 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Mechanical Settings. plumbing. click Round. For Categories. 11 1/2". ensure that Long Wire Tick Mark is selected. click Sizes. 25 In the left pane. Holding CTRL. for 3 1/2". 30 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Electrical Settings.rfa and click Open.rfa and I_Long Wire Tick Mark. and demand factors for electrical systems. wiring. 23 In the left pane. Modify mechanical settings Revit MEP has discipline settings that define the appearance and behavior of the system components in a project. clear the check boxes under the Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing columns. and fire protection systems. 27 Click OK. clear the check boxes under the Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing columns. 4 1/2". click Wiring. 10 1/2". 31 In the left pane of the Electrical Settings dialog. 32 In the right pane: ■ ■ ■ For Hot Wire Tick Mark. After standard settings have been established for an organization. 29 In the Load Family dialog: ■ ■ Browse to the Imperial Library ➤ Electrical Components ➤ TickMarks folder. select I_Hook Wire Tick Mark. ensure that Hook Wire Tick Mark is selected. piping. 26 In the right pane. For Ground Wire Tick Mark. Discipline settings can be defined for electrical and mechanical disciplines. 21 In the left pane of the Mechanical Settings dialog. under Pipe Settings. for 3/4". select Identity Data. and 12 1/2". 5 1/2". Mechanical settings determine the behavior and appearance of the ductwork and piping for mechanical. Define the tick marks that are used on wires by loading a family. power distribution systems. ensure that Long Wire Tick Mark is selected. and 5 1/2". 22 In the right pane. For Neutral Wire Tick Mark. 24 In the right pane. under Duct Settings. select Views. 4 1/2".19 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Group parameter under. for 3 1/2". click Rectangular. Click OK twice. Duct sizes that are not commonly used are removed from the sizing lists to avoid having them created when sizing or laying out ducts.

30 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects .rvt. From the Positioning list. 37 Save this file to a location on your local system. and adjust the display settings of the Revit Architecture project. Linking Projects In this exercise. 3 Select the template you saved in the previous exercise and click Open. click Training. select Family and Type. synchronize the two models for monitoring changes. you link the architectural model with the MEP model. To enable this coordination. You can also set filters to determine the number of views and sheets that are displayed. select Auto . 38 Close the file. under Template file. you can specify the order in which the views and sheets are displayed in the Project Browser. select Type/Discipline and click Edit.Origin to Origin. 34 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down and click Browser Organization. You need to create the MEP model for the project. select Project. Create a new project using the template created in the previous lesson 1 Click ➤ New ➤ Project. 2 In the New Project dialog. select Associated Level. Notice that the file is saved as a template. click Browse. 7 In the Import/Link RVT dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. and groups that are contained in a project. 35 On the Views tab of the Browser Organization dialog. sheets. Link a file 6 Click Insert tab ➤ Link panel ➤ Link Revit. For Sort by. Click Open. families. select View Name. For Then by. In addition. You can use these techniques to create templates that are customized to your projects. under Create new. 4 In the New Project dialog. 36 On the Folders tab of the Browser Organization Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Group by. You can customize the organization of project views and sheets in the Project Browser to group them into folders. Close coordination between the two models is essential because the building envelope changes will directly affect the MEP design. select Sub-Discipline. 5 Click OK.Organize the Project Browser The Project Browser lists all the views. Select Ascending Click OK twice. Select Imperial\Arch Link Model_i. For Then by. you link a Revit Architecture project to a Revit MEP project. An architect has created a preliminary architectural model for a building project using Revit Architecture.

The architectural model links to the MEP model and the current view remains active. 8 If necessary, reposition elevations in the plan view as shown.

Enable bounding elements for spaces 9 In the drawing area, select the linked architectural model. 10 Click Modify RVT Links tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. 11 In the Type Properties dialog, under Constraints, select Room Bounding. 12 Click OK. 13 Press ESC to deselect the linked model. Add levels 14 Expand Views (Type/Discipline) ➤ HVAC ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation) ➤ ??? and open North - Mech. 15 Zoom to the right side of the building to view the levels.

Linking Projects | 31

16 Click Architect tab ➤ Levels & Grids panel ➤ Level. 17 On the Options Bar, click Plan View types. 18 In the Plan View Types dialog, verify that Ceiling Plan and Floor Plan are selected and click OK. 19 On the left side of the view, click the level line for 03- Floor. 20 Move the cursor to the right side of the view and click to insert the level line for Mechanical 3. 21 Repeat the previous steps to create another level line for the roof. 22 Click Place Level tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. Adjust level lines You can adjust the level lines in the MEP design to match the level lines in the architectural model. 23 Select the level line for Level 2 and click the value.

24 Enter 12 and press ENTER. 25 Repeat the previous steps to adjust the level line for Level 2.

32 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects

Monitor the architectural levels You can monitor the elements within a Revit MEP model, and when the monitored elements are not synchronized, warnings notify you of any violations. These violations happen when the original monitored element from the linked project has changed, a copied monitored element in the host project has changed, or both original monitored and copied elements have changed. Warnings may also appear when the original element in the linked file is deleted or the copied element in the host file is deleted. Using the Copy/Monitor tool, you can copy elements within a current project or from a linked project to a host project. This establishes a relationship between the copied and original elements, which helps monitor changes to the original element and report differences. After copying, appears above the copied elements, indicating that a relationship is established, and that the copied elements are monitored. If you modify a monitored element, a warning message displays, indicating that an element has changed. 26 Click Collaborate tab ➤ Coordinate panel ➤ Copy/Monitor drop-down ➤ Select Link. 27 In the drawing area, highlight the linked model, and click to select the linked model. The Copy/Monitor tab is displayed. 28 Click Copy/Monitor tab ➤ Tools panel ➤ Monitor. 29 In the drawing area, click the MEP level line labeled Level 1, then click the architectural model level line labeled 01-Entry Level. appears and the monitor tool ensures that both level lines remain coordinated. 30 Repeat the previous steps to monitor the level lines for level 2, level 3, and the level 4. 31 On the Copy/Monitor tab, click Finish to exit the Copy/Monitor tool. Disable the display of architectural levels 32 Click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 33 On the Revit Links tab of the Visibility/Graphics Override dialog, for the link file, click By Host View. 34 On the Basics tab, of the RVT Link Display Settings dialog, click Custom. 35 On the Annotation Categories tab:

For Annotation Categories, select Custom.

Linking Projects | 33

■ ■ ■

Select Show categories from all disciplines. Under Visibility, deselect Levels. Click OK.

36 Click OK.

Creating and Applying a View Template
In this exercise, you create a view template and apply it to your project template. Create a view template 1 Click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ View Templates drop-down ➤ Create template from current view. 2 In the New View Template dialog, for Name, enter Mechanical View and click OK. 3 In the View templates dialog, under View Properties, for V/G Overrides RVT Links, click Edit. 4 On the Revit Links tab of the Visibility Graphics Override dialog, for the link file, click Custom. 5 On the Basics tab, of the RVT Link Display Settings dialog, click Custom. 6 On the Model Categories tab:
■ ■ ■ ■

For Model Categories, select Custom. Select Show categories from all disciplines. Under Visibility, deselect Parking, Planting, Roads, Site, and Topography. Click OK.

7 Click OK twice. Apply a view template 8 In the Project Browser, right-click Views (Type/Discipline) ➤ HVAC ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation) ➤ ??? ➤ North - Mechanical and click Apply View Template.

34 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects

9 In the Apply View Template dialog, under View Templates, select Mechanical and click OK.

10 Close the file with or without saving your changes.

Modifying System Settings
In this exercise, you learn how to control the system settings for Revit MEP. System settings are local to each computer and applied to all projects; they are not saved to project files or template files.

Modifying General System Options
In this exercise, you modify the settings that control your local Revit MEP working environment. These settings control the graphics, selection default options, notification preferences, journal cleanup options, and your username when using worksharing. Set graphics settings 1 Click ➤ Options.

2 In the Options dialog, click the Graphics tab. 3 Under Colors, select Invert background color, and click OK. 4 Click ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new project.

5 In the New Project dialog, under Template file, click Browse. 6 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\Templates\i_Tutorial_Default.rte. 7 Click OK. Notice that the drawing area is black. 8 Click ➤ Options.

9 In the Options dialog, click the Graphics tab.

Modifying System Settings | 35

10 Under Colors, click the value for Selection color. 11 In the Color dialog, select yellow, and click OK. NOTE You can also specify the Alert Color. When an error occurs, the elements causing the error display using this color. 12 Click the General tab. 13 Under Notifications, specify the following options:
■ ■

For Save reminder interval, select One hour. For Tooltip assistance, select None.

14 Click OK. 15 Click Architect tab ➤ Build panel ➤ Wall drop-down ➤ Wall. 16 Sketch a straight horizontal wall in the center of the drawing area. 17 Press ESC to end the command. 18 Select the wall.

Notice the selected wall is yellow rather than the default red. 19 Press ESC to end the command. 20 Place the cursor over the wall but do not select it. Notice that a tooltip is not displayed. However, the Status Bar displays information about the highlighted element. 21 Close the file without saving it.

Specifying File Locations
In this exercise, you specify default file locations. These settings control locations of important Revit MEP files, including your default project template, family template files, and family libraries. Set file locations 1 Click ➤ Options.

2 In the Options dialog, click the File Locations tab. 3 Under Default template file, click Browse.

36 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects

Notice that you can choose an industry-specific template as your default template.

TIP To view a template, you can start a new project with that template. Click and click Browse to select a template. 4 Click Cancel. 5 Under Default path for user files, click Browse.

➤ New ➤ Project,

6 In the Browse For Folder dialog, select the folder to save your files to by default, and click Open. 7 In the Options dialog, under Default path for family template files, click Browse. This path is set automatically during the installation process. These are the family templates that you use to create new families. It is unlikely that you would ever want to modify this path. However, there are some circumstances where you may need to modify the path, such as in a large, centralized, MEP firm where customized templates reside on a network drive. 8 Click Cancel. Specify library settings and create a new library 9 In the Options dialog, click Places. 10 In the Places dialog, note the list of library names. The list is dependent on the options that you selected during installation. Each library path points Revit MEP to a folder of families or training files. You can modify the existing library names and path, and you can create new libraries. An icon for each library displays in the left pane of all Revit MEP Open, Save, Load, and Import dialogs.

When you are opening, saving, or loading a Revit MEP file, you can click on the library folder located in the left pane of the dialog. In the following illustration, notice that the libraries display as icons in the left pane of the dialog.

Specifying File Locations | 37

and click OK twice. 18 In the left pane of the Open dialog. Load. 14 Navigate to C:\My Documents or a folder where you want to create a personal library of Revit MEP projects. 16 Click 17 Click (Move Rows Up) until My Library is at the top of the list. and change the name to My Library.11 In the Places dialog. and Import dialogs. click (Add Value). 13 Click in the Library Path field for My Library. Save. and click (Browse). The library icons display in the order in which they are listed in the Options dialog. or families. 38 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . 12 Click in the Library Name field of the new library. The new library displays in the left pane of all Revit MEP Open. 15 Under Library Name. ➤ Open. and click Open. TIP You may want to create a new folder first. templates. click My Library. and select it as the library path. click the My Library icon.

click Edit. It allowed SHTMTL-CU because you set the spelling options to ignore words in uppercase. Modify spelling settings 1 Click ➤ Options. custom color files. 19 Click Cancel. Under Additional Render Appearance Paths. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. 5 In the text editor. If you want to relocate this path. click Places. specify the new location here. (Remove Value) to delete the library.Notice that Revit MEP navigates directly to the library path. such as bump maps. click OK. view the current path. select Ignore words in uppercase. click Edit. 21 On the File Locations tab. 22 Select My Library. 11 In the Options dialog. 13 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. 3 Under Settings. 27 Click OK. 7 Click File menu ➤ Exit. 26 Under Render Appearance Library Location. 2 In the Options dialog. scroll down to view the list of building industry terms. and enter This is sheetmtl-Cu and SHTMTL-CU. 9 In the text editor. enter sheetmtl-Cu. you may want to set up an office library on a network path to increase productivity and maintain office standards. 4 Under Personal dictionary contains words added during spell check. 20 Click ➤ Options. This path is determined during installation. 12 Create a new project using the default template. 23 Click 24 Click OK. you can specify the locations of other files used to define render appearances. If you work in a large office. This path specifies the location of the Render Appearance Library. click the Spelling tab. Specify rendering settings 25 Click the Rendering tab. 6 Click File menu ➤ Save. 10 Click File menu ➤ Exit. 14 Click in the drawing area. Notice that the spell checker allowed sheetmtl-Cu because you added it to the custom dictionary. Specifying Spelling Options In this exercise. and decal image files. 16 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Spelling. 8 Under Building industry dictionary. you modify the spelling settings and the custom dictionaries for Revit MEP. Specifying Spelling Options | 39 . 15 Click Annotate tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify.

Revit MEP uses the largest increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. Modifying Snap Settings In this exercise. Snap settings are system settings that are applied to all projects and not saved within a project file. you modify snap settings. delete sheetmtl-CU. under Dimension Snaps. 40 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . 22 In the text editor. 23 In the text editor. under Template file. 24 In the Options dialog. 6 In the Snaps dialog. click Training Files. or use the shortcut keys to force a particular snap method. 19 In the Options dialog. click Edit. Modify snap increments 1 Click ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new Revit MEP project.17 In the Spelling dialog. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. click File menu ➤ Save. 5 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Snaps. click Close. and then click File menu ➤ Exit.rte. and enter 1 . You can turn snap settings on and off. 25 Close the file without saving it. click OK. 21 Under Personal dictionary. As you zoom in and out within a view. click in the Length dimension snap increments box following the value 4’ . In this exercise. click Browse. Notice that you can modify both length and angular snap increments. and use shortcut keys to control snapping on an instance basis. and open Imperial\Templates\i_Tutorial_Default. You can add an increment by entering the value with a semicolon after it. click Restore Defaults. work with snapping turned off. 4 In the New Project dialog. This command resets the spelling settings to their original configuration.. 18 Click ➤ Options. 2 In the New Project dialog. you modify snap increments. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. click the Spelling tab. click OK. 20 Under Settings.

A listening dimension refers to the dimension that displays while you are sketching. snapping reverts to the system default settings. You can use these shortcut keys at any time when working on the design. This dimension reacts to the movement of the cursor and numerical keyboard entries.7 Under Object Snaps. enter SM. While sketching. If it does not. Notice that when snapping is turned off completely. zoom in until the listening dimension snap increment shifts to 1’. Notice that the listening dimension snaps at 4’ increments. Sketch without snapping 13 While sketching the wall. Modifying Snap Settings | 41 . you can right-click and select a zoom option from the shortcut menu. and move the cursor to the right. TIP To zoom while sketching. For example. 10 On the Options Bar. use the wheel button on your mouse. zoom out until it does so. you can also use the zoom shortcut keys. notice the 2-letter acronyms next to each object snap option. 11 Click in the center of the drawing area. This is the increment that you added previously. deselect Chain. click OK. 8 In the Snaps dialog. and only midpoint snaps are recognized until you commit an action. 9 Click Architect tab ➤ Build panel ➤ Wall drop-down ➤ Wall. If you do not have a wheel button. 12 While sketching a generic straight wall. the listening dimension reflects the exact length of the wall as you move the cursor to the left or right. After you click to place the object at the midpoint. if you want to snap an object to a wall midpoint. such as ZO to zoom out. enter the shortcut key SO to turn snaps off.

19 Enter SM. 15 Click in the drawing area to start a second wall. 24 Under Dimension Snaps. 42 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . 21 Click to start the wall at the midpoint. 23 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Snaps. and specify the wall endpoint. click in the Length dimension snap increments box. When you use shortcut keys to control snapping. 20 Notice that the cursor now snaps only to the midpoint of the wall. the command is only active for one click of the mouse. Make sure you also delete the semicolon. and delete the value 1’ . This is the snap shortcut key that restricts all snapping to midpoints. and the wall edges.. 26 Close the file.14 Click to set the wall endpoint. it will snap to the endpoints. 25 Click OK. with or without saving it. 22 Move the cursor downward. the midpoint. 17 Click Architect tab ➤ Build panel ➤ Wall drop-down ➤ Wall. Do not set the wall end point. Notice that the cursor snaps to various points on the wall. and move the cursor to the right. If you move the cursor along the wall. Use snapping shortcut keys 16 Click Place Wall tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. Notice that snapping is once again active. 18 Place the cursor over the horizontal wall you added previously.

43 . you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan mechanical systems.Creating a Mechanical System In this tutorial. You also learn how to design a mechanical air system and a mechanical piping system.

44 .

you perform a heating and cooling loads analysis to determine the heating and cooling requirements for the building. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. In this lesson. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided training file. you first plan the system. After finishing each exercise. The training files that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training Files ➤ Imperial directory. If the tutorial training files are not present. water source heat pump (WSHP). At the end of the tutorial. This information is used for heating and cooling loads analysis. you first configure the linked architectural model. you begin planning the system by placing spaces in the building. This workflow begins with system planning and concludes with system designing. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially. you will understand the process.autodesk. To create a mechanical system in Revit MEP. Then you assign zones to the spaces in order to control the spatial environment. and specific techniques for designing mechanical systems.Planning Mechanical Systems 4 In this tutorial. you follow a series of lessons and exercises that teach the recommended system design workflow for Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise.com/revitmep-documentation and download them. go to http://www. 45 . Because most MEP engineers work with a linked model during system design. After applying a color scheme to the zones. you can choose to save your work. They contain information about the locations in which they are placed. you prepare a floor plan so that you can place spaces in later exercises. However. you design a mechanical system for an office building. In this exercise. you learn best practices for system design while understanding how Revit MEP makes systems design more efficient. methodology. By following the recommended workflow. duct system and a hydronic piping system. This system consists of a cooling tower. The goal of this tutorial is to teach you to design a mechanical system using Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. As you create the mechanical system. and then you create a plenum level. Preparing Spaces Spaces allow you to calculate the volume of the areas in the building. You can search this directory to verify that the training files have been downloaded.

This makes the architectural components (such as walls. You must place spaces in all areas (occupied and unoccupied) of the building to create an accurate analytical model and achieve an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. The status bar located at the bottom of the window and the tooltip indicate the Linked Revit Model. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . under Constraints. and ceiling) are defined as room-bounding.Space Plan is highlighted. In this section. select Room Bounding. and after the linked model highlights. click Training Files. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_01_i. These components are defined in the architectural training file. 2 Place the cursor over the linked model. indicating that it’s the active view. 5 Press Esc to clear the selection. 3 Click Modify RVT Links tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. make certain that architectural elements (such as walls. Next. Configure the linked model for space bounding The most common method of designing systems in Revit MEP is to work within a linked architectural building model. Add a Plenum level You create plenum levels so that you can place spaces in the unoccupied plenum areas (between the ceiling and the floor above) of the building. and click OK. NOTE When working with a linked file. 4 In the Type Properties dialog. 1 In the Project Browser. not in the MEP training file. roof.rvt. The linked model is configured to place spaces using the linked building geometry to define the space volume. click to select it. 46 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . and floors) recognized as boundaries for spaces. ceilings. you configure a linked model in order to begin designing systems in it. you add a level for plenums.

A new plenum floor plan view named Level 2 Plenum is created. and click OK. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ MEP . and select Level : Plenum from the Type Selector drop-down. The new level is placed. click Yes (this will happen every time you create a new level). ■ 11 Draw a plenum level above Level 2 as follows: ■ ■ Click the left endpoint of the Level 2 line to specify the start point of the plenum level. 8 Click Place Level tab ➤ Element panel. For Offset. Preparing Spaces | 47 . verify that only Floor Plan is selected. those categories in the Project Browser are listed as question marks. 15 When asked to rename the corresponding level and views. and double-click West .Design ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation). Click Plan View Types. click 10 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ (Line). 12 Click Place Level tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. This creates only a floor plan after the level is added. 9 On the Draw panel.MEP. A black datum indicates a reference level (the level is not taken into account during the creation of a view template). enter 8'. and in the Plan View Types dialog. Verify that Make Plan View is selected. and enter Level 2 Plenum. and is listed in the Project Browser under Views (Discipline) ➤ ??? ➤ ??? ➤ Floor Plans. 14 Double-click the level name (Level 4). offset by the Offset value (8' 0" ) above level 2. Click the right endpoint of the Level 2 line. 13 Zoom in on the right side of the elevation view.6 In the Project Browser. 16 Press Esc. Because you have not yet specified the view classification or sub-discipline properties. 7 Click Architect tab ➤ Levels & Grids panel ➤ Level. and a blue datum indicates that a plan view exists for the level.

right-click Level 2 Plenum. click Edit. In this exercise. select Design. 21 Close the file with or without saving it. This information is used for heating and cooling loads analysis. it is highly recommended that you always begin each exercise by opening the training file that Autodesk provides. and for Offset. For Sub-Discipline. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ ??? ➤ ??? ➤ Floor Plans. Apply a view template 19 Open the Level 2 Plenum view. for Top. The view graphics are modified based on the template applied. verify that Associated Level (Level 2 Plenum) is specified with an offset of 0. and click Apply Default View Template. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. you place spaces in areas of the building model. enter 0. right-click Level 2 Plenum. The Level 2 Plenum floor plan is now listed under MEP .Plenum ➤ Floor Plans in the Project Browser. Under Identity Data. select Plenum Plan.Plenum. for View Scale. Under Extents. In this exercise. Notice that the site plan displays in the view. verify that 1/8" = 1'-0" is selected. For Cut plane. In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. However. you use space separation lines to create a new fully bounded area. NOTE After finishing each exercise. Placing Spaces Spaces allow you to calculate the volume of the areas in the building. for Default View Template. for Level. you created a plenum level and a corresponding floor plan view in preparation of placing spaces. you can choose to save your work. select Level Above (Level 3). and then place spaces in various types of areas. select MEP . You apply the default view template so that only the architectural floor plan displays. 20 In the Project Browser. Under View Depth. In the next exercise. for View Range. 18 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Graphics.Modify plenum properties 17 In the Project Browser. and click Properties. For View Classification. They contain information about the locations in which they are placed. enter an Offset of 1' 0". ■ Click OK twice. 48 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems .

For (Tag Location).rvt. 6 Place the cursor in the room until the space snaps to the room-bounding elements (floor. 4 Click Place Space tab ➤ Element panel. This specifies the vertical extent of the space.Space Plan is highlighted.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_02_i. For Upper Limit. 2 Zoom to the empty room to the left of the corridor. and select Space Tag With Volume from the Type Selector drop-down. select New. select Level 2 Plenum. indicating that it’s the active view. You can also use the Highlight Boundaries feature to view boundary elements in the model. Spaces can be created automatically and numbered in sequence by using the Create Automatically tool. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . and ceilings). For Offset. ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify that Leader is cleared. For Space. Placing Spaces | 49 . select Horizontal. walls. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Place a space 1 In the Project Browser. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. click Training Files. enter 0. 5 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Verify that Tag on placement is selected.

ensuring coordination between the files. and click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.Plenum ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 Plenum. enter 219. ■ 11 Press Esc to clear the selection. Notice that the space number and name now match the room number and name from the linked architectural file. 14 In the drawing area. 13 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Close Hidden. 50 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . double-click the section head in the Library to open the section view (Section 26). 8 Click Place Space tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. Click OK. for Number. Prepare the plenum view 12 Open Design ➤ MEP . For Name.7 Click to place the space. 9 Select the space. enter Library. 10 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Identity Data. The software automatically zooms the new view to the same location as in the open view.

demonstrating the parametric functionality of the software. Notice that the space is created in the section view at the same time. and then click Modify. 20 Click in the Library to place the space. 21 Using the method learned previously. 19 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ Verify that Tag on placement is selected. change the space name to Plenum and the number to 219P. Place a space in the plenum 16 Click in the Level 2 Plenum floor plan to activate it. 17 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. enter 0. For Offset.15 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. For Upper Limit. Placing Spaces | 51 . select Level 3. 18 Select Space Tag With Volume from the Type Selector drop-down.

Placing a Space in an Open Area In this exercise. and then split the space using a space separation line. 24 Notice that the floor plan has updated with the changes. 23 Click OK.22 In the Instance Properties dialog. under Energy Analysis. 25 Close the file with or without saving it. This is beneficial to split up large volumes for equipment selection and sizing. 52 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . select Plenum and verify that Occupiable is cleared. you place a space in a large corridor area.

and select Space Tag With Volume from the Type Selector drop-down. enter 0. and for Offset. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_03_i. select Level 3. for Upper Limit. 5 On the Options Bar.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.Space Plan is highlighted. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. 4 Click Place Space tab ➤ Element panel. Placing a Space in an Open Area | 53 . indicating that it’s the active view. click Training Files.rvt. and then press Esc. In the left pane of the Open dialog. verify that Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . 2 Zoom in to the central corridor near the stairs. 6 Click above the top stair to place the corridor space. Place a space in an open area 1 In the Project Browser.

notice the corresponding architectural room name and number. click the endpoint of the lower wall in space Instruction 221. 14 Click perpendicular to the opposite curtain wall to end the horizontal separation line.7 In the Project Browser. enter Corridor. which was numbered 219Q. 11 Close the schedule view. If you had modified the name and number in the schedule view instead. and press Enter. 12 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space Separator. 10 Using the same method. and notice that the schedule updates with the changes. and double-click the title of the plan view to maximize the view. double-click the space name. as shown. and scroll to the newly placed space. the plan view would have updated with the changes. 54 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . In the schedule. open Schedules/Quantities ➤ Space Schedule. 9 In the floor plan. change the space number to 216A. 8 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 13 To specify the start point of the separation line.

place a space in the lower area of the split space. 17 Change the name of the space to Corridor. Placing a Space in an Open Area | 55 .15 Press Esc twice. 16 Using the method learned previously. Notice the changed boundaries of the corridor space. The new space is numbered correctly (216B). 18 Close the file with or without saving it. with an upper limit of Level 3 and an offset of 0.

Add a multi-level space 1 In the Project Browser. and change the upper limit to account for the entire volume of the chase.Space Plan is highlighted. Click in the Male restroom to specify the section endpoint. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . 56 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . and place a section in the view as shown: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click in the Cafeteria space to specify the section start point. 2 Zoom to the chase between the male (226) and female (225) restrooms in the north wing.rvt. click Training Files. Shading is a visual indication of where spaces have been placed (shaded) and where they need to be placed (empty). you place a space in a chase. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click (Flip Section) to reorient the section. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_04_i.Placing a Multi-Level Space In this exercise. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. indicating that it’s the active view. If necessary. 3 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Section. Use the lower drag control to change the section boundary as shown.

13 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Constraints. 10 In the plan view. ■ ■ 14 Click OK. 7 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics Override dialog. Under Identity Data. 5 Double-click the section head to open the section view. but that the space does not fill the entire chase. enter 0. Notice that you can see the space in the section view as well as in the plan view. enter 225PC. select Roof Level. On the Options Bar. right-click. enter 4'. expand Spaces. 12 Click in the section view. 11 Click Place Space tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. enter Chase. For Limit Offset. for Upper Limit. click in the chase area to place the space. add a space: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. You enter a value that is above the level of the roof. select Interior and Reference. 6 Enter VG. 8 Enter WT to tile the views. 9 Zoom each view as necessary in order to view the chase. for Name. for Upper Limit. For Number. select Level 3. Placing a Multi-Level Space | 57 . and then click OK.4 Press Esc. In the plan view. For Offset. and click Element Properties. select the space.

and maximize the view. and you placed spaces for various types of areas. All spaces in the view are tagged. the space displays the volume up to the roof only. 19 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. ceilings.Bounding elements (such as walls. You used space separation lines to create a new fully bounded area that was part of a larger area. 58 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . floors. You have created a plenum level and a corresponding floor plan view. 20 Close the file with or without saving it. Tag spaces 16 Open Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . 17 Type ZF. under Loaded Tags. 15 Press Esc. and roofs) define the extent of space volume used in calculations. select Space Tag With Volume. Because the chase space is limited by a bounding element. and click OK. you work with zones in order to control the spatial environment and perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis.Space Plan. In the next exercises. 18 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag All.

3 Right-click in the System Browser. The different graphics in the System Browser indicate whether a space is occupiable ( unoccupiable ( ). Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 4 Double-click Default to display a list of the spaces in the building model.Zoning is highlighted. verify that Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . NOTE A space cannot be placed into an area without being added to a zone. which removes the space from the Default zone.Viewing Zones in the System Browser After spaces are placed in the building. Revit MEP immediately adds them to the Default zone. After a space is placed in an area. under Spaces. you view and verify zones in the System Browser. The recommended workflow is to add each space to a zone that you create. 1 In the Project Browser. and verify that All Disciplines is selected. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Notice that Default is currently the only zone. To display space reference lines. Space shading and the space tags indicate spaces. In this exercise. You can change the Occupiable parameter for each space. NOTE All space reference lines have been hidden in the training file to provide a clearer view of the floor plan. The System Browser opens and docks to the right of the drawing area. ) or Viewing Zones in the System Browser | 59 . click Training Files. indicating that it’s the active view. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Zones_01_i. it is automatically added to the Default zone. click View ➤ Zones. Zones allow you to control the spatial environment and to perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. click Reference. The browser is a hierarchical list of spaces and the zones to which they have been assigned.rvt. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog.

and Electrical 220 spaces. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Creating Zones on a Single Level In this exercise. the Edit Zone tab displays. click Reference. you assign spaces to a zone. and click Finish Editing Zone. and click OK. you assign spaces to zones in the building. on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. Instruction 221. select Computer Lab 222. The Zone tool is active. 6 In the Instance Properties dialog. You work with a single zone until you click Finish. you will use the System Browser to confirm that the spaces are in the new zone. The graphic in the System Browser updates.5 In the System Browser. verify that Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . and modify the zone properties. and verify the zones in the System Browser. indicating that the space is occupiable. NOTE The Edit Zone tab provides zone tools and information. under Energy Analysis. The new zone is listed in the System Browser. indicating that it’s the active view. Next. double-click 121 Cafeteria. you can add or remove a space from the zone. 60 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems .Zoning is highlighted. select Occupiable. click Training Files. 4 In the drawing area. NOTE All space reference lines have been hidden in the training file to provide a clearer view of the floor plan. under Spaces. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Zones_02_i. and a new zone is created. To display space reference lines. 3 Click Edit Zone tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Add Space. Using the Edit Zone tab.rvt. 7 Close the file with or without saving it. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Zone. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Assign spaces to a zone 1 In the Project Browser. As you do this. Space shading and the space tags indicate spaces.

Expand HVAC Zones. 5 With the drawing area active. type VG. The zone reference line indicates that the 3 spaces are in the zone. ■ The new zone displays with color fill and a zone reference line. 6 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog: ■ ■ Under Visibility. expand the new zone and notice that the Computer Lab. Click OK. Instruction. and then select only Interior Fill and Reference Lines (clear Boundary and Color Fill). select HVAC Zones. and Electrical spaces are added to it (and removed from the Default zone). you need to activate the zone visibility. To view the zone in the drawing area.In the System Browser. Creating Zones on a Single Level | 61 .

and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Zones_03_i. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 10 On the Edit Zone tab. on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. Create a zone for spaces on multiple levels 1 In the Project Browser. you assign spaces on multiple levels to a zone in the building. The new zone name displays in the System Browser. and then click Modify HVAC Zones tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Zone Properties. NOTE All space reference lines have been hidden in the training file to provide a clearer view of the floor plan.West . In the left pane of the Open dialog. Rename the zone 7 Select the zone. you can drag the zone reference line to relocate it and better view the spaces that are in the zone.rvt. enter 2 . verify that Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . for Name. under Spaces. In this exercise. To display space reference lines. under Identity Data.West . 62 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . you assigned zones to spaces that were on the same level of the building. click Training Files. Creating Zones on Multiple Levels In this exercise.Area B. and verified the zones in both the floor plan views and in the System Browser. 12 Close the file with or without saving it. indicating that it’s the active view.Zoning is highlighted. and click OK. 11 Close the System Browser.Zoning. 9 In the System Browser. 3 Open Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . click Reference. expand 2 .TIP After you finish editing the zone. You activated zone visibility in the views. Space shading and the space tags indicate spaces. click Finish Editing Zone.Area B to confirm that the 3 spaces are in it. 2 Zoom in to Lounge 215 (to the right of the central stairs). 8 In the Instance Properties dialog. and verify the zone in the System Browser. 4 Enter WT to tile the 2 windows.

Tag a zone 11 Activate the Level 1 . and then select the tag so that you can use the drag control to move it as desired. and add the Lounge 215 space to the zone. 12 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 15 Press Esc. 9 With the Add Space tool active. 13 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ Verify that Leader is selected. 7 Click Edit Zone tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Add Space. 10 Click Finish Editing Zone.Zoning view to activate it.Zoning floor plan. Verify that the distance is 1/2". Creating Zones on Multiple Levels | 63 . 6 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Zone.Zoning view.Zoning view. select Lounge 120 to add it to the zone. click in the Level 2 . 8 In the Level 1 .5 Click in the Level 1 . Select Attached End. 14 Click in the Lounge space to tag the associated zone. zoom out.

for Name Value. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. on the ViewCube. and zone information. and view graphical representations of the spaces to verify space boundaries and volumes. you created a zone for spaces on different levels of the building. 17 In the Change Parameter Values dialog.Zoning to make it the active view. and click OK. Verify building information 1 In the Project Browser. 19 Close the file with or without saving it. In this exercise. Front. 64 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . you verify the building. click Training Files. View a space 3 In the preview pane of the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. under Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans. In the left pane of the Open dialog. the tag displays “Not Computed” for those values. You can expand the zone in the System Browser to view the spaces in it. 18 Press F9 to display the System Browser. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Heating and Cooling Loads. enter Lounge . Rename the zone 16 In the Level 1 . double-click Level 1 . click the corner where the Top. Because the heating and cooling loads calculations have not been performed. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_01_i.The tag only displays in the view where it was placed. space.Zoning view.East. double-click the zone tag. Working with the Analytical Model In this exercise. The new zone name displays in the System Browser.rvt. and Left corners converge to orient the model as shown.

■ Click to deactivate the Highlight tool. 5 On the Details tab: ■ Expand 1_South_Lounge. Using the Highlight tool. The Isolate tool allows you to verify one or more spaces even if they are usually obstructed by other spaces or by the building architecture. You can also view a space in relation to the other spaces or architecture in the entire building. click (Isolate). NOTE Wireframe displays the volume of a space measured by the interior boundaries. Right-click in the preview pane to access pan and zoom commands. and select 109 Lounge. Click (Highlight). you isolate the space. you can verify that the space boundaries are as you defined them. ■ Working with the Analytical Model | 65 . The Details tab contains a hierarchical list of spaces and the zones that have been assigned to them. With 109 Lounge selected. Next. ■ TIP You can use the ViewCube to spin/reorient the view. verify that Wireframe is selected.4 On the View Selector (located below the preview pane). The space displays while all other spaces are hidden. The space for 109 Lounge highlights in red.

and in the People dialog. 6 Click to deactivate the Isolate tool. verify that <Building> is selected. 8 Verify the space information: ■ For Space Type. click . select 1_South_Lounge. select Lounge/Recreation. Revit MEP provides default settings for space types. and in the Electrical Loads dialog. Next. click . and click OK. These specify the space usage and construction materials for the space.■ On the Details tab. and then click OK. For Electrical Loads. This specifies the number of people or the area per person for the space. You can use the Space Type Settings dialog to adjust settings as necessary. Verify space information 7 On the Details tab. and in the Space Type Settings dialog. and then click OK. verify that <Default> is selected for Occupancy and Heat Gain (per person). select 109 Lounge. Below the list of spaces and zones. ■ ■ ■ Next. This specifies the lighting and power loads for the space. you verify information that will be used during a heating and cooling loads analysis of the zone. the space information displays for the selected space. scroll down in the left pane. All spaces in the zone display in isolation. 66 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . verify that <Default> is selected for Lighting Values and for Power Values. click . you verify information that will be used during a heating and cooling loads analysis of the space. For Construction Type. For People.

This is usually preferable to indicating a particular percentage for those parameters. you allow the values to be calculated by the loads engine. The inner volume is bounded by interior surfaces of walls. and zoom to the corner of the building as shown. View the shaded model 11 On the View Selector. the zone information displays for the selected zone. This indicates the outdoor air per person.00 °F : N/A is specified. outdoor air per area. and other room-bounding components. cooling air temperature. verify that N/A : N/A : N/A is specified. verify that 70. 10 Verify the zone information: ■ ■ For Service Type. roofs.00 °F : N/A is specified. floors.00 °F : 90. you use the Shading view to examine the inner volume of the model for voids. click (Shading). This indicates the heating set point. and air changes per hour. verify that 74. heating air temperature. and dehumidification set point. and humidification set point. 12 Using the methods learned previously.00 °F : 54. 13 Deactivate the Isolate tool. For Heating Information. highlight and isolate the space for 109 Lounge to view its inner volume. Below the list of spaces and zones. verify that <Building> is selected. Next. NOTE Shading displays the inner volume of a space.Verify zone information 9 Select 1_South_Lounge. NOTE By not specifying values for the humidification set point and dehumidification set point. For Cooling Information. This indicates the cooling set point. Working with the Analytical Model | 67 . ■ ■ For Outdoor Air Information.

Notice that there is a void in a second-floor plenum space. select Plenum. 18 Click in the empty plenum area to place the space. 68 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . notice that Condition Type is Heated and Cooled. For Name. it doesn’t need to be included in the heating and cooling loads analysis. open MEP . 15 In the Project Browser. 17 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For Upper Limit. 16 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. enter 212P.Plenum ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 Plenum. and click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Under Energy Analysis. 20 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. select Level 3. For Offset. and then click Place Space tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. for Number. Notice that Condition Type updates to Unconditioned. Click OK. ■ ■ Add the plenum space to a zone 21 In the drawing area. Under Energy Analysis. select Plenum. select the zone that includes all plenum spaces for Level 2 (named 2_Plenum). Add a space to fill a void 14 In the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. Modify space properties 19 Select the space. click Cancel. Because this is an unoccupied space. enter 0.

Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads In this exercise. For Location. The report that is the result of this analysis allows you to determine the heating and cooling demands of the building. 4 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Building Type. 26 Close the file with or without saving it. On the Place tab. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans. verify that Manchester. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and select space Plenum 212P. 3 In the Instance Properties dialog. and viewed the spaces in the preview pane to verify space boundaries and volumes. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_02_i. 2 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Information. NH. 24 Click Finish Editing Zone. select School or University. you specify project settings that affect heating and cooling. Select Automatically adjust the clock for daylight savings changes. you verified building. and verify that the space has replaced the void. In the left pane of the Open dialog. for City.22 Click Modify HVAC Zones tab ➤ Zone panel ➤ Edit Zone. and zone information. In this exercise. double-click Level 2 . for Energy Data. space. click Edit. enter 03101. 25 Open the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. click Training Files. is selected.Space Plan. and then click In the Manage Place and Locations dialog: ■ ■ . Specify project settings 1 In the Project Browser. under Energy Analysis. click in the Value field. For Postal Code.rvt. Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads | 69 . 23 Click Edit Zone tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Add Space. and you perform a heating and cooling loads analysis.

When the location is in an area that observes Daylight Savings Time. For Latent. enter 150 Btu/h. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. For Export Complexity. For People. a cooling load. for Building Service. under Volume Computations. for Values. verify that Areas and Volumes is selected (default setting). select Specified. you need to select this option. verify that Level 1 is selected. NOTE The Areas and Volumes option must be selected in order to perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. verify that 1' 0" is specified. ■ In the Type Properties dialog. select Heated and cooled. you receive a message that the Areas and Volumes option is not checked and that the space volumes will be approximate. Select Area per person. and then click . select space Library 219. ■ On the Weather tab. and enter 50 sq. In the People dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Occupancy. ft. both. click Edit. this option adjusts the times automatically. verify that Simple with Shading Surfaces is selected. For Condition Type. For Sensible. Under Heat Gain (per Person). click in the Value column. and click Element Properties. For Sliver Space Tolerance. verify that Water Loop Heat Pump is specified. Click OK twice. select Specified. For Building Construction. verify that New Construction is selected. verify that <Building> is specified.Audio Visual. For Project Phase. For Ground Plane. 6 On the Computations tab of the Area and Volume Computations dialog. For Space Type. and click OK. after opening the Heating and Cooling Loads tool. for Values. 70 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . right-click. In order to select a space. enter 200 Btu/h. ■ ■ ■ ■ In the Space Type Settings dialog. and click OK. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify area and volume setting 5 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel drop-down ➤ Area and Volume Computations. If. verify that Occupiable is selected. This is the parameter that determines whether a space is included in a heating load. and click OK. 7 Zoom in to the center area of the building. first highlight it using the cursor so that the space crossing lines display. verify that Use closest weather station (Manchester Airport) is selected. or neither. 8 In the drawing area. select Library . 9 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Energy Analysis.

and click to learn the cause for the warning. You should correct the space error in the building model. you view the space and zone volumes in the building model. select Actual. For Building Construction. (opens the IMPORTANT The Heating and Cooling Loads dialog contains building information that only affects the heating and cooling loads analysis. For Building Service. Under Power. See Help for more information about the integrated heating and cooling loads analysis tool and its calculation methods. it should be corrected before you calculate loads. If you have made changes to settings in the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. For Location. Next. verify that Manchester. 12 Click the Details tab. click Information). verify that Water Loop Heat Pump is selected. and can be modified here. verify that School or University is selected. You can view the building materials for this construction type by clicking Building Construction dialog). verify that Heating Set Point is 70°F . and click OK. click OK to save your changes and close the dialog. In the Electrical Loads dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Lighting. For Electrical Loads. Click OK twice. for Values. Select the space associated with the warning. ■ Select 2_Middle_Library. is specified. If a (Warning) displays for any space in the building. 10 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Heating and Cooling Loads. 11 On the General tab of the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. for Values. 13 Under 2_Middle_Library. and then re-open the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog to begin calculations. click Calculate. verify that <Building> is specified. verify the settings specified earlier: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Building Type. Various factors (such as analytical and inner volumes of the spaces) are analyzed as Revit MEP performs the heating and cooling loads analysis. Perform a heating and cooling loads analysis 14 In the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. You have verified the building information. There should be no warnings displayed. Revit MEP stores this information as project information. and under Heating Information. The information for the space that you entered in the Element Properties dialog displays. click Edit. select Actual. select 219 Library.■ ■ ■ Click OK. NH. Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads | 71 . (Zone Heating ■ In the Heating Information dialog.

weather. 22 Close the file with or without saving it. In this exercise. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_03_i. Click OK. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 15 Review the loads report for project. you assign a color scheme to a zone in the building. or zone information. the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog closes. verify that Cooling Load by Zone is selected. indicating that it’s the active view. and then click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. or make any changes to the model. 17 In the loads report. 21 Click OK. You are taken to the place in the report where the space information is displayed for review. 18 Close the report and activate Level 2 . otherwise the loads report or schedules will not reflect your changes. review the Calculated Loads and Design Loads. click the blue hyperlink for 219 Library. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . TIP You can find all generated Loads Reports in the Project Browser under Reports. 3 In the drawing area. For Color Scheme. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 20 In the Instance Properties dialog.Zoning Load Fill is highlighted. select HVAC Zones. Creating a Zone Color Scheme In this exercise. select 219 Library. 16 After you review the loads report. under Energy Analysis. you performed a heating and cooling loads analysis on your building and viewed the loads report. and a loads report displays. Assign a color scheme to a zone 1 In the Project Browser. 4 In the Choose Space Type and Color Scheme dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Space Type. under the zone summary for 2_Middle_Library. NOTE You must perform a new heating and cooling loads analysis each time you modify building.rvt. click Training Files. space. and zone information for the building model. 19 In the drawing area.After the heating and cooling loads analysis is completed. 2 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel ➤ Legend. 72 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . you can rezone the model as necessary to optimize equipment usage in the building. click to the right of the building to place the legend. Notice that the space information was automatically updated. A color scheme allows you to communicate and identify parameters visually and spatially rather than by using space schedules or accessing element properties.Space Plan. space.

Creating a Zone Color Scheme | 73 . under Schemes. You want a scheme that allows for a greater tonnage range.5 Zoom in to the legend. 8 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. select the color scheme legend. The new scheme displays in the view. select Tonnage Range. in 1-ton increments. Notice that the cooling load is based on tonnage value. 7 Click Modify Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. and click OK. Select a different color scheme legend 6 In the drawing area.

11 Using the method learned previously. 9 Type ZF to zoom the view to fit the drawing area. Apply a color scheme to a section view 10 In the Project Browser.The new scheme allows for a greater range of cooling load values. The colors are updated in the plan view to match the new scheme type. add a Cooling Load by Zone color scheme to the HVAC zones of the section view. 74 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . open Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 26.

For Name. For Phase. you create a schedule that you use as a design tool for the supply air system. you applied a color scheme to the zones in your building. select New Construction. you create a schedule for the supply air system project. In the next exercise. If you select Show categories from all disciplines. select Spaces. enter Space Airflow Schedule. Instead of placing this schedule on sheets as a construction document. Creating an Airflow Schedule | 75 . Creating an Airflow Schedule In this exercise. Select Schedule building components.Space Fill is the active view. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Report and Schedules panel ➤ Schedule/Quantities. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_04_i. ■ ■ ■ ■ Specify schedule properties 4 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ At the bottom left of the dialog. select Spaces.rvt. you use it as a design tool to determine whether the correct amount of airflow is being supplied to each of the rooms in the model. Define the schedule 1 In the Project Browser. In this exercise. click Training Files.12 Close the file with or without saving it. 3 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ Under Category. more category options are available. for Select available fields from. Click OK. verify that Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . You then use the schedule to adjust the air terminal airflow properties to more closely meet design requirements.

select Airflow Delta. add Actual Supply Airflow to the formula. and then click Conditional Format. For Fields. ■ ■ Using the method learned previously. You format the Airflow Delta field to display as red when the difference between calculated and actual airflow is outside an acceptable range. and click OK. double-click: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Level Number Name Calculated Supply Airflow Actual Supply Airflow The selected fields are added to the Scheduled fields section. For Discipline. and Blank line. select Calculated Supply Airflow. For Formula. and then click . In the Fields dialog. Define conditional formatting for the airflow delta ■ In the Conditional Formatting dialog: ■ For Test. In the Calculated Value dialog. ■ On the Formatting tab: ■ ■ For Fields. Header. Select Formula. Select Ascending. select Not Between.(minus sign) after Calculated Supply Airflow. select Level. select Level. the calculated value named Airflow Delta displays under Scheduled fields and will display as a column in the schedule.■ Under Available fields. 76 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . select HVAC. ■ Click Calculated Value. Click OK. enter . For Type. for Formula. and then select Hidden field. select Number. Specify additional schedule properties ■ On the Sorting/Grouping tab: ■ ■ ■ For Sort by. In the Schedule Properties dialog. select Air Flow. enter Airflow Delta. Define the airflow delta formula 5 In the Calculated Value dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. click (Browse). For Then by.

verify that Show is highlighted. enter -25 CFM and 25 CFM. the schedule gives a visual indication of the discrepancy. Double-click the column boundary to expand the column to the width of the text. In later exercises. ■ The schedule displays. Because no air terminals have been placed in the model. notice that the software will test for delta values that are outside the range of -25 to 25 CFM. all the Actual Supply Airflow values are 0. select red. a view opens that contains the selected space. you use the airflow schedule when adding system components to satisfy the required airflow. and all Airflow Delta fields are red for occupiable spaces. For Background Color. click the color swatch. Under Conditions to Use. In the Color dialog. In the next lesson. you created an airflow schedule and defined properties such that when the airflow delta is in an unacceptable range. you begin the designing phase by placing air terminals in the spaces. When you select a field and click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ Highlight in Model. and click OK. Creating an Airflow Schedule | 77 . or right-click a column to hide or unhide it. and you can manipulate the display of columns as with any spreadsheet. This concludes the planning stage of the systems project. In this exercise. Click OK twice. 7 Close the file with or without saving it.■ ■ ■ For Value. right-click to access schedule properties. 6 On the Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Filter Unplaced or Unenclosed Items panel.

78 .

you size ductwork and validate your air system design. and work with the airflow schedule.Designing Mechanical Air Systems 5 Designing air systems in Revit MEP is a straightforward and intuitive process. 79 . You begin your supply air systems design by placing air terminals in rooms and adding a water source heat pump (WSHP). In this lesson. After completing the air systems lesson. Then. After system creation. Placing Hosted Air Terminals In this exercise. learn a method to precisely place air terminals into the ceiling plan. As you place the air terminals. IMPORTANT It is highly recommended that you complete Designing Mechanical Air Systems before starting Designing Piping Systems. you use automatic layout tools and manual placement to create the primary and secondary supply air systems and ductwork to connect the components that you added. you will have been introduced to concepts and practices that you will use to design the piping systems. you place air terminals in the ceiling of the rooms. you modify air terminal parameters. you will create supply air systems.

Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. indicating that it’s the active view. 80 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . and scroll to space 223. In the left pane of the Open dialog. the space crossing lines display. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . and the tooltip and status bar display the space name.Design ➤ Ceiling Plans ➤ Level 2 . Prepare the design views 1 In the Project Browser.HVAC Ceiling is highlighted. zoom in to space Lounge 223 in the upper left corner. and then click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. click Training Files. 4 Click in the schedule view to make it active. When you highlight a space using the cursor. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_01_i. and notice that the space is selected in the plan view as well. 5 Select space 223 in the schedule.rvt. 2 Double-click Schedules/Quantities ➤ Space Airflow Schedule. 3 In the ceiling view.

for Flow. 17 Move the cursor down. 13 On the Options Bar. Also. click Place on Face. type 12. 11 Click Place Air Terminal tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command.Hosted from the Type Selector drop-down. Placing Hosted Air Terminals | 81 . select the diffuser. NOTE Hosted air terminals are placed at the height of the host. and then select both Copy and Multiple. and press Enter. 8 Click Place Air Terminal tab ➤ Element panel. the hosted elements are updated as well. 18 Repeat to add a third diffuser.Rectangular Face Round Neck .Hosted : 24"x24" Face 8" Neck . and select Supply Diffuser . Modify the supply diffuser flow 12 In the ceiling plan. 15 On the Options Bar. 16 Select the upper left corner of the diffuser as the copy start point. which in this case is the ceiling grid. and then press Esc to end the command. the Airflow Delta is calculated accordingly. verify that Constrain is cleared. Notice that the lounge’s Actual Supply Airflow field in the schedule updates after the terminal is placed. If the host element is modified or moved. The schedule updates with the new flow data.HVAC Ceiling to make it the active view. Copy the supply diffuser 14 With the diffuser still selected. click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. and press Enter. 7 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Air Terminal.Add a supply air terminal 6 Click in Level 2 . as shown. 19 Place 2 additional diffusers as shown. 10 Click to place the supply diffuser in the upper left corner of the space. 9 On the Placement panel. enter 425 CFM. Multiple allows you to place multiple copies of the diffuser without reactivating the Copy tool after each placement.

28 On the Placement tab. 24 In the Open dialog. select each of the 5 supply diffusers.Hosted : Workplane-based Return Diffuser from the Type Selector drop-down. Place return diffusers 26 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Air Terminal. you edit the return diffuser family in order to align the diffuser edges to the ceiling grid lines. and then press Esc. navigate to Training\Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\Diffuser Tag. click Place on Face. and the airflow delta value is within acceptable range. you load one from the library as follows: 23 In the alert dialog. 21 On the Options Bar.Tag diffusers 20 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. Each diffuser has an airflow capacity of 425 CFM.rfa. as shown. 82 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . notice that the insertion point snaps the center of each diffuser to a grid intersection instead of centering the diffuser between grid lines. As you place the return diffusers. and click Open. clear Leader. 25 In the drawing area. If alerted that there is no tag loaded for the diffuser object. click Yes. 22 In the drawing area. select one of the diffusers. 27 Select Return Diffuser . 29 Place 2 diffusers. Next.

for Reference. You change the symbolic lines to strong references so that they can be used to align to the lines of the ceiling grid. Placing Hosted Air Terminals | 83 . and click to select the lines. 32 In the Project Browser. press Tab to highlight the chain of lines. click Yes. 35 In the Instance Properties dialog. 33 Highlight one of the symbolic lines. open Views (all) ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Ref. as shown. select one of the return diffusers. and click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Family panel ➤ Edit Family. select Strong Reference. 36 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Family Editor panel ➤ Load into Project. Level. under Other. 31 In the alert dialog. 34 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Instance Properties.Edit the diffuser family 30 In the drawing area. and click OK.

37 In the Family Already Exists dialog, click Overwrite the existing version and its parameter values. Align the diffusers in the ceiling grid 38 In the ceiling plan, zoom in to the return diffuser at the bottom left of the Lounge. 39 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Align. 40 In the drawing area, select the vertical grid line as shown.

41 Select the right edge of the diffuser. 42 Select the horizontal grid line as shown, and then select the top edge of the diffuser.

43 Using the same method, align the other return diffuser, as shown, and then press Esc twice.

44 While pressing Ctrl, select both return diffusers, and on the Options Bar, for Flow, enter 650 CFM310 CFM, and press Enter. Modify the airflow display arrows 45 Select the return diffuser at the lower left, right-click, and click Element Properties. 46 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Mechanical, clear LeftArrow, and click OK.

84 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems

47 Using the same method, clear RightArrow and DownArrow for the other return diffuser.

48 Close the file with or without saving it.

Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals
In this exercise, you place air terminals in a room that does not have a dropped ceiling. As you place the air terminals, you modify air terminal parameters and work with the airflow schedule.

Training File
■ ■

Click

➤ Open ➤ Project.

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_02_i.rvt.

Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 85

Add non-hosted air terminals 1 In the Project Browser, expand HVAC - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1 - HVAC Plan - Design to make it the active view. 2 On the View Control Bar, for Scale, click 1/8" = 1'-0". 3 Zoom in to space Instruction 115, at the lower left corner of the building. When you highlight a space using the cursor, the space crossing lines display, and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. 4 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Close Hidden. 5 Open Schedules/Quantities ➤ Space Airflow Schedule, and then click View tab ➤ Windows ➤ Tile. 6 Click in the floor plan to make it the active view. 7 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Air Terminal. 8 In the Type Selector, select Supply Diffuser - Rectangular Face Round Neck : 24x24 - 8 Neck. 9 On the Options Bar, verify that Tag on Placement is selected. 10 In the drawing area, click to place the air terminal in the space as shown, and then click Place Air Terminal tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify.

The schedule was automatically updated with the actual supply airflow capacity of the diffuser. Also, the diffuser was tagged as it was placed. NOTE The software assigns sequential numbers to components in the order in which they are placed in a drawing. If you delete a component and subsequently place more of the same component in the same drawing, the number assigned to the deleted component will not be used. As a result, your components may be numbered differently than those in the training files. 11 Select the diffuser, and then click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 12 Modify the diffuser properties:

In the Instance Properties dialog, under Constraints, for Offset, enter 8'. Because non-hosted components are associated with a level, the offset value is the height of the diffuser from the level. Under Mechanical - Airflow, for Flow, enter 360 CFM. Click OK.

■ ■

86 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems

13 With the diffuser still selected, click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 14 Select the bottom left corner of the diffuser, move the cursor down, type 20', and then press Enter. 15 Press Esc. By copying the diffuser, you are also specifying the same offset and flow for the new diffuser. Notice that the copied air terminal does not have a tag.

16 Using the same method, select both air terminals and copy them 14' to the right.

Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 87

Tag existing diffusers 17 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 18 On the Options Bar, clear Leader. 19 Select each of the untagged diffusers, and then press Esc. Create an embedded schedule You enhance the schedule by creating an embedded schedule to show data (system type, type, mark, and flow) for individual diffusers in each space. 20 Double-click the title bar of the Space Airflow Schedule to maximize it, and then right-click in the schedule, and click View Properties. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Other, for Embedded Schedule, click Edit. 22 In the Schedule Properties dialog:
■ ■

Select Embedded Schedule. For Category, select Air Terminals, and then click Embedded Schedule Properties.

23 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog, under Available Fields, double-click System Type, Type, Mark, and Flow. 24 On the Sorting/Grouping tab, for Sort by, select Mark. 25 Click OK 3 times. The schedule is updated and lists the data for individual air terminals in each space. Although the Airflow Delta value is within an acceptable range, it is a negative value. Next, you modify the airflow capacity of the diffuser in the lower left corner of the space to offset the increased heat gain of the southwesterly exposure.

88 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems

Modify an airflow value in the schedule You use the schedule as a design tool to modify the airflow. 26 Using the method learned previously, tile the windows. 27 In the schedule, under space 115, select SD 1-12-110. 28 In the embedded portion of the Space Airflow Schedule, for Flow, enter 450 CFM, and press Enter. 29 Using the same method, change the flow for SD 1-12-111 and 112 to 330 CFM. Each change is dynamic and immediately propagates throughout your project, because you are modifying the digital database of building information. This digital database information source is the integral concept of Building Information Modeling (BIM).

The Airflow Delta value for the space updates to a positive number.

Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 89

Place air handling equipment 30 Close the Space Airflow Schedule, and maximize Level 1 - HVAC Plan - Design. 31 In the drawing area, select the zone (2-West-Area T) that includes space 115. As you highlight the zone, pay attention to the tooltip and the status bar to be sure you’re selecting the zone and not the space. The zone indicator has a line that spans all spaces in the zone, as shown.

32 Open the Instance Properties dialog, and under Energy Analysis, verify that the Calculated Heating Load value is 33807 Btu/h and the Calculated Cooling Load value is 3.9 ton (approximately 1.5 times the heating load). 33 Click OK. 34 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. 35 In the Type Selector, select WSHP - Horizontal - High Efficiency - 2-5 Tons - Left Return - Right Discharge : 4 Tons. 36 In the drawing area, zoom and pan to the double door for space 115. 37 Press Spacebar twice to change the rotation of the pump so that the supply faces the space and the return faces away from the space. 38 Click to select an insertion point so that the supply is at the approximate center of the doorway. 39 Press Esc twice to end the command.

90 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems

40 Access the instance properties for the heat pump. Verify that the measured distance is 9'. for Constraints ➤ Offset. 44 Zoom in to space 115. 42 Press Esc to clear the selection. ■ ■ For the end point. and click OK. Verify equipment mounting heights 43 Open Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 26. and verify the height of the WSHP: ■ ■ Click Modify tab ➤ Inquiry panel ➤ Measure drop-down ➤ Measure Between Two References. 41 In the Instance Properties dialog. click to select the midpoint of the bottom of the WSHP. enter 9' 0"2750. Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 91 . For the start point. click the Level 1 line.

This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses. This workflow is the Revit MEP recommended best practice for systems creation. IMPORTANT Unlike logical connections. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems In this exercise. right-click the title. you create low pressure secondary supply air systems. 5 Verify that there are no Mechanical systems listed. 4 If the System Browser title is Zones. 2 Zoom in to space Lounge 223 at the upper left of the building. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. 45 Close the file with or without saving it.HVAC Plan . including energy analysis. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click View ➤ Systems. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. In this exercise.rvt. they are necessary to perform calculations (such as sizing) that reference the physical geometry.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . physical connections (ductwork) are not required for systems designing. You then create the logical connection between the system components. 92 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . You create air systems by placing air terminals and mechanical equipment. When you highlight a space. Explore the System Browser 1 In the Project Browser.Press Esc. However.Design is highlighted. click Training Files. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_03_i. you then create ductwork to physically connect the system components. After creating the logical connection. A Revit MEP system is the logical connection between system components such as air terminals and mechanical equipment. you also use the System Browser to validate systems. verify that Design ➤ HVAC . indicating that it’s the active view. the space crossing lines display. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.

On the Options Bar. 11 In the drawing area. 16 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Add To System. Only mechanical equipment components can be highlighted and selected when you are using the Add To System tool. Create a secondary air system 7 In the drawing area. 14 In the Instance Properties dialog. Revit MEP assigned them to the Default Supply Air system.IMPORTANT In the System Browser. expand Mechanical ➤ Supply Air ➤ Mechanical Supply Air 1. and Create Systems) available on the Modify Air Terminals tab. Connect Into. Notice that there are layout and system tools (Generate Layout. 6 Keep the System Browser open. System Name. 13 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ System Properties. and drag it to the bottom of the screen so that it displays horizontally below the floor plan. select the 3 supply diffusers shown in red and circled. all system components are organized in a folder tree hierarchy. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 93 . 9 Click Modify Duct Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. and then select the last supply diffuser in space 223. 12 In the System Browser. 10 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Add To System. These tools vary depending on the equipment used to create a system. 15 Click Cancel. 8 Click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Supply. the assigned diffusers move to the respective system folder. Because each system component must be assigned to a system after it is placed. All of the diffusers (air terminals) that you added are located under default systems categories in the Unassigned folder. Note that the Flow value (1700 CFM) is equal to the sum of the flow values for the 4 diffusers you added to the system. select the supply diffuser at the upper left of space 223. review the Number of Elements. As you add diffusers to systems. and Flow value. the number of elements is updated. Notice that a mechanical system now displays in the System Browser.

In this exercise. for System Name. 26 Click Finish Editing System. Rename the system Next. 94 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . highlight the value and click Ctrl+V to paste over the selection. This workflow is the Revit MEP recommended best practice for systems creation. In this exercise. for Mark. under Identity Data. 20 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Equipment Properties. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. NOTE The organization of the Mechanical folder in the System Browser has changed so that the WSHP is the parent. 27 Close the file with or without saving it. you also use the System Browser to validate systems. 23 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ System Properties. You used the Create Supply Systems tool to logically connect air terminals to the WSHP. The system name is updated from Mechanical Supply Air 1 to WSHP 2-45 in the System Browser. and the system connects them. and then select the WSHP (located outside the space). 21 In the Instance Properties dialog.17 Using the method learned previously. you create ductwork to physically connect system components. 19 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Select Equipment. which updates the name in the System Browser. 18 Click OK. you rename the system to match the identifying data (Mark) of the equipment properties. 25 Click OK. you created low pressure secondary supply air systems for the building. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems In this exercise. highlight the value (WSHP 2-45) and click Ctrl+C to copy it. under Mechanical. access system properties to see that the flow value (2125 CFM) has updated to include the flow value of the final supply diffuser. 22 Click OK. the air terminals are the children.

A Generate Layout tab displays. click Training Files. for Solution Type.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. the space crossing lines display. which provides various layout tools. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. 4 In the drawing area. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 95 . 5 On the Options Bar. Also. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . Lines indicate the proposed duct layout (blue signifies a main duct line and green signifies a branch). and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_04_i. select Network. In the left pane of the Open dialog. indicating that it’s the active view. select the upper left diffuser. 6 Use the Next Solution and Previous Solution arrows to scroll through the available solutions. each with branches off the main duct at 90-degree angles. 3 If the System Browser isn’t displayed. and then click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout.HVAC Plan. the Network type provides several solutions.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . the software recognizes the system components and sketches a temporary layout path connecting them. 2 Zoom in to space Lounge 223 in the upper left corner. and display solution 1. When you highlight a space using the cursor.Design is highlighted. click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser to display it.rvt. Add ductwork using the Generate Layout tool 1 In the Project Browser. In this case.

enter 9' 10 1/2". 9 On the Generate Layout panel. For Duct Type. For Duct Type.7 On the Options Bar. enter 3'. select Rectangular Duct: Mitered Elbows / Tees. 8 In the Duct Conversion Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Main. For Flex Duct Type. 96 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . 10 Select a vertical segment of the main duct. For Maximum Flex Duct Length. WARNING Be careful not to drag the main duct too close to the diffusers. For Offset. click Settings. and use the drag control to drag it just to the left of the lighting fixtures. If there is not enough room for the software to create the necessary fittings. select Flex Duct Round : Flex . select Rectangular Duct: Mitered Elbows / Tees. Select Branch. click Modify. Click OK. For Offset.Round. as shown. enter 9' 10 1/2". you’ll get an error in a later step.

a transition connecting the elbow is automatically added.11 Click Finish Layout. NOTE Errors may occur while attempting to create duct geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing. Either relocate the system components. or offset elevations are incorrect. Remember to always check duct connectivity after modification. For example. All fittings required to connect the duct system to system components are automatically added. The sketch lines are converted to ductwork. The most common cause of these errors is that the duct usually has insufficient space to be created. or manually modify the duct. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 97 . as is the elbow itself. select a different layout solution.

Flow. If the entire network does not highlight. Press Tab a third time to highlight the entire network of connected ducts. Notice that the legend includes all possible values for the color scheme. and click Modify Duct Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. you can repair the connection by dragging the duct segment end point away from its current connection point and then dragging it back again to reconnect. and then click OK. select Duct Color Fill . Add a color scheme legend 12 In the drawing area. Usually. fittings. but not all values are used in this view. This disconnection will be located at the point where the highlighting stops. you check connectivity by moving the cursor over a segment of ductwork so that it highlights and then pressing Tab. 14 Click to the right of the system to place the legend. for Values Displayed. 98 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . The ductwork is a physical (not a logical) connection. 13 Click Analyze tab ➤ Color Schemes panel ➤ Duct Legend. the branch to which the duct is connected highlights. 15 In the Choose Color Scheme dialog. NOTE When multiple ducts and fittings are connected. select By View. You can delete ductwork and the system remains. Typically the disconnect results from not having enough room between the components that make the connection.NOTE Notice that the ductwork is not listed in the System Browser. and click to select it. a disconnection exists. highlight a segment of the main duct. 17 In the Type Properties dialog. under Graphics. you can verify connectivity as you create a system. Press Tab a second time to highlight the entire network of connected ducts up to the first piece of connected equipment. and equipment. and click OK. Modify the legend display 16 Select the color scheme legend. press Tab twice to highlight the entire system. thus it is not part of the system. Using a flow-based color scheme. for Color Scheme. The first time you press Tab.

note the Air Flow value (2125 CFM). and click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. select Duct Color Fill . select the color scheme legend. decrease the flow value by 100 CFM. 19 In the Instance Properties dialog.Airflow. select the WSHP. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 99 . 25 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. under Mechanical .Velocity. 21 Access the instance properties for the WSHP. 26 Click OK.The legend now shows only the color scheme values used in this view. select one of the diffusers in the system. and press Enter. and click OK. 24 Click Modify Duct Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. for Schemes. Edit color scheme 23 In the drawing area. for Flow. 22 Close the Instance Properties dialog. and on the Options Bar. Notice that the color fill for the connected ductwork has updated. and then press Esc to clear the selection. Modify flow values 18 In the drawing area. Use the velocity-based color scheme as a visual reference to confirm that air is flowing through the system ductwork at the appropriate velocity. and notice that the flow value has updated with the change. The outflow for the WSHP is calculated as the sum of the airflows for all downstream air terminals. 20 In the drawing area.

and enter . for Branch Sizing. you need to modify the layout: ■ ■ ■ In the warning dialog. highlight a segment of the duct.Calculate duct sizes 27 In the drawing area. Click OK. select Calculated Size Only. Select Restrict Height. and drag it to the right. 29 In the Duct Sizing dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Sizing Method. The flow information graphically represents the properties of duct systems so that you can easily identify problems with the system. 100 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . and select 16". Under Constraints. Select the upper segment of main duct. select Friction. 28 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Duct/Pipe Sizing. If you get an error that there is not enough room to place the required fittings. Repeat the steps necessary to select the entire system and then size it.08 in-wg/100ft. The ductwork and fittings are updated. press Tab 3 times to highlight the entire system (including the WSHP). and then click to select it. click Cancel. Select Only.

Use the information that displays (flow. 32 Click System Inspector tab ➤ System Inspector panel ➤ Inspect. 33 Move the cursor over the system components. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 101 . 31 Click Modify Ducts tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ System Inspector. 30 Select one of the ducts in the supply air system. you can target problem areas directly in your design and resolve them. pressure. Notice that the ribbon now displays a System Inspector tab.Inspect the system The System Inspector is a tool that lets you place the cursor over each system to inspect it for airflow. Ductwork and system components must be connected to a system (logical connection). and pressure loss) to find deficiencies in the system. Using this tool. static pressure. so that you can modify the system design accordingly. and pressure loss. and a system must contain ductwork (physical connection). The selected system components or duct must be logically and physically connected for you to use the System Inspector to inspect airflow and pressure inside ductwork.

you modify existing ductwork and then use the Connect Into tool to connect components to the existing air system.NOTE As you inspect a system. In the left pane of the Open dialog. also known as the critical path. remember that all information is color-coded according to pressure. 36 Close the file with or without saving it. 102 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . 34 Zoom in to various parts of the system and verify that the flow arrows are correct.rvt. 35 Click Finish. click Training Files. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_05_i. You also convert rigid duct into specified lengths of flex duct. Manually Creating Ductwork In this exercise. Red information and arrows indicate the highest percentage of pressure loss due to friction.

2 Zoom in to space Instruction 115 in the lower left corner. 4 Click Place Duct tab ➤ Element panel. and select the WSHP.Design is highlighted. 6 Click midway between the 2 top light fixtures to specify the end of the first segment of the main duct.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . and click to specify the end of the main duct. Manually Creating Ductwork | 103 . and select Rectangular Duct : Mitered Elbows / Beveled Taps from the Type Selector drop-down. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . 5 Press Spacebar to make the new duct match the WSHP duct size and location. 7 Move the cursor to just below the lowest set of diffusers.HVAC Plan . 3 Right-click the supply air connector (the connector facing the room’s double doors).Manually create main duct line 1 In the Project Browser. indicating that it’s the active view. and click Draw Duct.

for Offset. Connect the remaining diffusers using the Connect Into tool The Connect Into tool is used to add or connect components to an existing air system. 11 On the Options Bar. use the connector grip to quickly and accurately locate a connector. Create branch duct lines 9 To begin branch duct. right-click the connector grip. The software accounts for the difference in height from the diffuser connector to the specified offset height. 12 End the branch by clicking at the intersection of the branch duct and the main duct. 15 On the ViewCube. select the top right diffuser. 13 Click Place Duct tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. and click Draw Duct. NOTE When drawing duct. 10 Select Rectangular Duct : Mitered Elbows/Taps from the Type Selector drop-down.8 Press Esc twice to end the command. Click this corner Resulting view orientation 104 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . double-click MEP .Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ Level 1 . and Left sides converge in order to orient the view as shown. 14 In the Project Browser. click the corner where the Top. select 9' 10 1/2". Front.3D MEP.

connect the remaining diffusers to the main duct. and is sized appropriately for the neck size of the diffuser. 22 Using the same method. Also.16 Zoom in to space Instruction 115. 19 In the drawing area. 20 Click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. in space 115. the color fill indicates the flow value. 18 Make the floor plan the active view. Because this branch has 2 end points (the diffuser and the connector into the main duct). 17 Tile the windows so that you can view results in 3D as you add duct in 2D. 21 Click the main supply duct to select it as the duct to connect into. it is considered a closed loop. The ductwork is automatically created. Manually Creating Ductwork | 105 . select the top unconnected supply diffuser.

24 Select the remaining diffusers. Revit MEP displays a warning that the flex duct that was created exceeds the Maximum Flex Duct setting in the Mechanical Settings dialog. Branch ductwork in 3D Add an endcap 26 In the plan view. and select the top left diffuser. 106 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems .Branch ductwork in 2D Convert duct to flex duct 23 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Convert to Flex Duct. zoom in to the open end of the main duct. 25 Press Esc. You can ignore the warning. A portion of the rigid ductwork is converted to Flex Duct.

30 Press Esc twice. 27 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Duct Fitting. Endcap in 3D Split and size main duct 31 Maximize the plan view. Size ductwork 34 Highlight a section of the main duct (which is now split).To ensure that the system has proper flow propagation and accurate system calculations. 29 Click the endpoint snap of the main duct. 33 Click on the main duct below the top set of diffusers as shown. Manually Creating Ductwork | 107 . 28 Select Rectangular Endcap : Standard from the Type Selector drop-down. press Tab to highlight the entire main duct run. 32 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Split. and click to select it. you need to add an endcap to create a closed loop. and then click Modify.

select a segment of the main duct. and then click OK. 36 In the Duct Sizing dialog. clear Restrict Height. such as a plenum. verify that the value is the total of the diffusers supplied by that segment of duct.Airflow. under Constraints. Verify duct sizing 38 In the drawing area. for Flow. 108 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . This height constraint is used when you place duct in a restricted space. 39 In the Instance Properties dialog. The ductwork is sized to provide appropriate CFM value for the system. and click Modify Ducts tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. under Mechanical . 37 Press Esc to clear the selection. verify the flow rate for the remaining segments of the main duct. 40 Using the same method.35 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Duct/Pipe Sizing. 41 Close the file with or without saving it. and click OK.

additional water source heat pumps from level 1. Inspect and validate the piping systems and physical connections. and a cooling tower located on the roof. using modulating valves to divert through the cooling tower during cooling mode. including 2 base mounted pumps. you create a hydronic piping system that is designed to run in a cooling mode and a heating mode.Designing a Mechanical Piping System 6 In this lesson. Add valves to allow the overall piping system to work in 2 modes: cooling and heating. In this lesson. This system is modeled to accommodate full system flow through a boiler. You begin the piping system design by placing water source heat pumps and a boiler on level 3 of the building model. Then. 109 . you learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Place mechanical equipment. Create return and supply piping systems. Automatically and manually lay out piping. Use a color-coded display to verify and adjust pipe sizing. or to bypass the cooling tower during heating mode. you create the systems and piping to logically and physically connect the system components. Use the System Browser to review the piping systems.

on level 3 of the building model. including 2 water source heat pumps (WSHP) and a condensing boiler.Level 3 mechanical piping system Adding Mechanical Equipment In this exercise. you place mechanical equipment. click Training Files. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_01_i. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open.rvt. 110 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . In the left pane of the Open dialog.

5 Press Spacebar to rotate the component.High Efficiency .Horizontal .Right Discharge : 6 Ton from the Type Selector drop-down.2-6 Tons . verify that Wall faces is selected.Adding air side equipment 1 In the Project Browser. 2 Zoom in to the right side of the shorter building wing. as shown. Adding Mechanical Equipment | 111 .Left Return . NOTE Although space tags are not included in this view. you can identify a space by placing the cursor over the space component. indicating that it’s the active view. 4 Click Place Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel.HVAC Plan .Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . 3 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. 7 On the Options Bar.Design is highlighted. and click to place it in the shorter wing of the building. A tooltip and the status bar (located at the lower left of the window) confirm the space name and number. in corridor 328. and select WSHP . 6 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimension panel ➤ Aligned.

as shown. 12 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. and in the Type Selector. verify that the WSHP is still selected. 11 Press Enter and then press Esc. click the dimension. 13 Place another WSHP to the left of the one you just placed. as shown. click the top edge of the WSHP. and enter 2'. 10 Select the WSHP. (Use the alignment sketch graphics to position the second WSHP the same distance from the corridor wall as the first.8 Click the corridor wall face. and click to place the dimension.) 112 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 9 Click Place Dimensions tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify.

as shown. and click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. enter 9'. Modify WSHP parameters 15 While pressing Ctrl. enter 12 GPM. Click OK. and click to place it in the mechanical room. Add water side equipment 18 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. 16 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Constraints. 17 Press Esc to clear the selection. and select Condensing Boiler : 500 MBH from the Type Selector drop-down. for Offset. select the 2 WSHPs. 19 Click Place Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel. Adding Mechanical Equipment | 113 . above and to the left of the Base Mounted Pump. Under Mechanical. for Water Flow. 20 Press Spacebar 3 times to rotate the component.14 Click Modify.

you create the return and supply piping systems. Creating a Piping System In this exercise. A system is the logical connection between system components such as water source heat pumps (WSHPs) and a boiler. Create the logical connection between the system components. and use the System Browser to review and confirm the systems.21 Click Modify. Create pipes to physically connect the system components. This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses. 22 Close the file with or without saving it. The recommended workflow to create piping systems is to: ■ ■ ■ Place mechanical equipment and other system components. 114 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . including flow and pressure.

Mech 330). 5 In the System Browser. click Training Files. Explore the System Browser 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_02_i. where it is easier to review the information.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . In the left pane of the Open dialog. 6 Expand the Unassigned folder. and expand the Default Hydronic Supply 1 and the Default Hydronic Return 1 systems to view the mechanical equipment placed in the building. analyses cannot be performed. physical connections (pipes) are not required for systems creation. This display option allows you to simplify the browser view by showing only the Piping discipline.IMPORTANT All system components are logically connected either by a system that you create or by a default system. You can create pipes to connect system components. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . 4 Click the titlebar for the System Browser window. and click View ➤ Piping. Unlike logical connections (systems).HVAC Plan . 2 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building (Space . Creating a Piping System | 115 . Chilled water supply system: 2 WSHPs and a cooling tower Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open.Design is highlighted. and drag the window down so it displays along the bottom of the screen. but without a corresponding system. indicating that it’s the active view. right-click the Systems column heading.

Notice that on the Options Bar. 12 In the drawing area. Create the hydronic return piping system 7 In the drawing area. Revit MEP immediately assigned them to the Default Hydronic Return and Default Hydronic Supply systems category located in the Unassigned folder. As you assign equipment to systems. TIP If you clicked outside of the drawing area. all system components are organized in a folder tree hierarchy according to the system that you assigned to them. This display indicates that the system is selected. the System Equipment is Condensing Boiler: 500 MBH. select the 2 WSHPs. 10 On the Options Bar. the assigned equipment moves from the Unassigned folder to the respective assigned system folder. 116 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . IMPORTANT All mechanical equipment in the project should be assigned to a system other than a default system. 11 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Select Equipment. You assign a system component to a system either by: ■ ■ Creating a logical connection (system) between the system components. leaving a large number of components in a default system can hinder performance and prevent accurate calculations for the systems where they should have been assigned. and the Edit System tool is not active. Equipment that remains in a default system is included in heating and cooling loads calculations. It does not indicate a pipe layout path. 9 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. select the boiler. for System Name. After you placed the WSHPs and boiler. while pressing Ctrl. select one of the WSHPs that you added to the system to activate this tool and the other options on the Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel. Keep the System Browser open and refer to it as you create systems. Therefore. They remain in the Default systems category until you assign them to a system. Assigning a system component to an existing system.In the System Browser. 8 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Hydronic Return. enter CHWR to represent Chilled Water Return. A red dashed line connects the 2 WSHPs in the drawing.

Notice that the Hydronic Return option does not display because the selected component already has a hydronic return system assigned to it. (You can click the Piping Systems tab to access the Return System properties. Creating a Piping System | 117 . 15 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Hydronic Supply. and select the second WSHP to add it to the supply system. You have created the hydronic return system.) 16 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. for System Name. 17 On the Options Bar.Design ➤ Floor Plans.HVAC Plan . 21 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building. 19 In the Project Browser. enter CHWS to represent Chilled Water Supply.13 Click Finish Editing System. under Design ➤ HVAC . and select the cooling tower. double-click Roof . 18 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. 20 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. Create the hydronic supply piping system 14 Select one of the WSHPs that you placed previously.Design.

IMPORTANT The new system named CHWS is now listed in the System Browser under Hydronic Supply ➤ Condensing Boiler: 500 MBH. The boiler is the only equipment that has connectors with compatible system types (hydronic supply and hydronic return). 24 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Select Equipment.22 In the Select Connector dialog. Notice that the Options Bar indicates 3 for the Number of Elements. 26 Click Finish Editing System. the cooling tower provides cooled water to the system. In heating mode. and bypasses the cooling tower. You can now view the systems hierarchy: CHWR and CHWS logically connect the boiler (parent) with the WSHPs (children). expand the Hydronic Return system category. and click Select. The hydronic supply system highlights in red. and click OK. indicating the logical connection. Confirm and validate the systems 27 In the System Browser. In cooling mode. and click Expand All. 28 Using the same method. 25 Select the boiler. right-click the Hydronic Supply system category. 29 Right-click CHWS. The CHWS system contains the 2 WSHPs and the cooling tower. the boiler supplies heated water to the system. 118 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . the water returns through the boiler into the cooling tower by way of the WSHPs. 23 Close the roof plan view. You select the boiler as equipment for supply to the WSHPs. select Connector 1 : Undefined : Round : 4'' : Cooling Water Supply In.

and click Properties. The CHWS Flow value is updated in the System Browser. including the flow rate and size of the component. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout In this exercise. enter 18 GPM. you create the physical connections in the pipe system automatically using the Generate Layout tool. You can select the columns that you want to display in the System Browser. and click OK. 34 Close the file with or without saving it. 33 In the Instance Properties dialog. under Mechanical. expand Piping. and click OK. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 119 . for Water Flow. 30 Right-click the Systems column heading. 32 In the System Browser. You also manually modify the layout path as required. 31 In the Column Settings dialog. select Fluid Type and Fluid Temperature. you can view several parameters. right-click the Flow value for one of the WSHPs in the CHWS system.In the System Browser. and click Column Settings.

and click OK. and click to select it. drag the cursor to the lower right corner to draw a selection box around the floor plan.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . indicating that it’s the active view. press Tab to highlight the system. 3 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building (Space . and the selected system components are already connected to more than one system (because they have multiple system connectors). You select a system in the dialog to view it in the drawing. click Check None. IMPORTANT If you select system components to create a pipe layout. the boiler. you are selecting all components within the view range of the active view.rvt. select CHWR. TIP Instead of selecting all components and filtering. Create the Level 3 return pipe layout 7 Select a WSHP. 4 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 120 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 5 In the Filter dialog. then the Select a System dialog displays. The level 3 water source heat pumps (WSHPs). When you draw a box to select components. click Training Files. Notice that all components within the Level 3 . 6 Press Esc to clear the selection.HVAC plan view range are highlighted. A system preview displays in red.HVAC Plan .Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . You use an alternate method of selecting the system in the next steps. you can place the cursor over a system component.Design is highlighted. Revit MEP provides several solutions from which to choose. 2 Beginning outside the building at the upper left corner. 9 In the Select a System dialog. select Mechanical Equipment. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_03_i. 10 Click OK. and the 2 base mounted pumps are selected (and display in red). 8 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. The layout path solutions display with the main in blue and the branch in green. and then click OK to create a layout for the currently selected system. Select components with the Filter tool 1 In the Project Browser.Mech 330).

click Settings. ■ ■ Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 121 . 14 On the Generate Layout tab. enter 1' 6''. select Perimeter. you can change the pipe type and the vertical offset at which the piping will automatically be created. In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. 12 In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. The perimeter solution creates a layout that runs parallel (along a perimeter) to the connectors of the selected system components. duct. 15 On the Options Bar: ■ For Solution Type. IMPORTANT The branch offset lets you automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. For Inset. You can modify this value for the main and branch elevations. structural beams. Click (Next Solution) until solution 4 of 5 is selected. 13 Click Cancel. verify that Solutions is selected. This functionality is useful for avoiding interference with pipes. It does not reference the architecture.11 On the Options Bar. or architectural components. verify that the Offset value for the Main and for the Branch is 10' 0''.

and press Tab 3 times. 18 Place the cursor over the piping. 122 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 19 In the drawing area. 17 Optionally. With each Tab. The piping is automatically created along with the appropriate connectors and fittings so that all of the piping segments are connected to equipment. and the flow for the other is 12. Branch in a pipe network up to a piece of equipment. to display the path with thinner lines. View the Status Bar to verify the branch option currently displayed. the Status Bar displays the components being highlighted: ■ ■ ■ Branch in a pipe network. you modified the flow value for the WSHPs.16 Click Finish Layout. Branch in a pipe network including the branch objects. the flow for one WSHP is 18. click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Thin Lines. select the pipe connecting the WSHP on the right to the boiler. Verify the flow In a previous exercise.

Add the Level 1 WSHPs to the return system 25 Select the WSHP on the left.The flow through this pipe should equal the flow of both WSHPs. This value indicates the total of the flow for the 2 WSHPs (18 GPM + 12 GPM). verify that the value for Flow is 30 GPM. under Mechanical. The flow from the 2 WSHPs travels into the boiler. 20 Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 24 Press Esc. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. 22 Select the boiler. and click OK. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 123 . and click OK. 23 Under Mechanical. notice that the Water Flow is 30 GPM. and access its instance properties.

Physically connect the multi-level WSHPs Previously. you physically close the CHWR loop. and verify that CHWR is selected from the System Selector drop-down. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . 31 Close the Level 1 plan view. 33 Zoom in to the piping that comes from the floor below. 124 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .Design. you logically added Level 1 WSHPs to the CHWR System. the Number of Elements is now 8. On the Options Bar. 29 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. 32 Click Finish Editing System. Next. double-click Level 1 . 28 In the Project Browser. the Level 1 WSHPs are connected to the chilled water return system (CHWR).HVAC Plan . which propagates flow throughout the system. 30 Draw a selection window to select the 6 WSHPs. click Edit System.26 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel. 27 On the System Tools panel. Logically. and zoom to fit the drawing in the view.Design ➤ Floor Plans.

so the total flow of 125 GPM indicates that the flow has propagated correctly. extend the pipe to the left until it connects to the center line of the existing pipe at the horizontal and nearest snap.34 Select the bottom piece of horizontal pipe. access its instance properties. the 6 WSHPs from Level 1 have already been added to the chilled water supply system (CHWS). Manually modify piping in layout mode 39 In the drawing area. and then click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 125 . select a WSHP. The Level 3 WSHPs generate a flow of 30 GPM. and then close the Instance Properties dialog. Verify the flow from the lower level 36 With the new pipe selected. and the flow coming from Level 1 is 95 GPM. review the properties for the boiler to verify that the Water Flow value is 125 GPM. 38 Using the same method. The fittings are automatically created to connect to the return piping coming from below. note that the value for Flow is 95 GPM. 35 Using the drag control. under Mechanical. NOTE For the purposes of this tutorial. 37 In the Instance Properties dialog. as shown. and click Cancel.

In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. ■ ■ 43 Click Generate Layout tab ➤ Generate Layout panel ➤ Remove. For Inset. enter 9' 6'' for both the Main Offset and the Branch Offset. 41 Click OK. For Slope. select Perimeter 1 of 5. enter 1' 6''. 126 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . select CHWS. enter 0''/12''.40 In the Select a System dialog. The inset is the distance from the pipe to the connection on the selected system component. 44 Click the boiler to remove it from the layout path solution. and then click OK. 42 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ For Solution Type. 45 Click the supply pipe from the cooling tower above. Click Settings.

select the right vertical green sketch line in the path.) 49 Select the 4-way arrow control. (Both sections are at the same elevation. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 127 . In a later exercise. 46 Click Modify. you connect the boiler to parallel-connected base mounted pumps. select the vertical sketch line just above the one you already selected. as shown.The boiler and cooling tower are no longer included in the layout path. and drag it to the left (just to the right of the double door in the underlay). 48 While pressing Ctrl. as shown. 47 In the drawing area.

you: ■ ■ ■ ■ Connect the boiler to the return piping. select the short vertical path line connecting the right WSHP (in the same location as the short segment of pipe). Remember to always check pipe connectivity after modification. To create the piping system. NOTE Errors may occur while you are attempting to create pipe geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing. You tile a plan view and a 3D view to simultaneously create the pipe (physical) connections and validate the pipe geometry. or offset elevations are incorrect. Add piping to close the supply loop. you manually lay out piping to create a closed loop system. and drag it to the right to align it with the sketch lines you just moved. The most common cause of these errors is that there is insufficient space to create the pipe. Either relocate the system components.50 Using the same method. or manually modify the pipe. 52 Close the file with or without saving it. Connect the base mounted pumps in parallel to the system. select a different layout solution. Connect the cooling tower into the supply system to maintain the closed loop. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout In this exercise. 51 Click Finish Layout. 128 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .

NOTE Default color filters for the Hydronic Supply and Hydronic Return have already been specified for this project in the Visibility Graphic Overrides dialog.Design is highlighted. click Training Files.Design ➤ 3D Views. As you work in the training file. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . double-click 3D HVAC Building. as shown. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. indicating that it’s the active view. 4 Adjust the view in both windows (use the ViewCube and Zoom tools) to see the connections on the boiler.rvt. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 129 . you will notice that the supply pipes are dark purple. You may find it helpful to view the system in both plan and 3D during design and validation.HVAC Plan . and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_04_i. Tile the views 1 In the Project Browser. Sometimes (such as during vertical alignment) it’s easier to select components in 3D. 3 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . 2 Under Design ➤ HVAC . and the return pipes are magenta. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

Modify return piping to accommodate supply piping 5 In the 3D view. select the section of piping. as shown. 6 Press Delete. draw a selection window around the elbow fitting and the small piece of pipe connecting into the boiler return connector. 7 In the plan view. 130 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .

Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 131 . 9 In the 3D view. 10 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. Click to specify the reference point. ■ Move the cursor up 4''. and press Esc to clear the selection. ■ Click to move the piping. select the boiler.8 Move the piping: ■ ■ Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move.

An automatic flow valve will be used to direct the flow from the boiler to the 2 pumps. 132 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . Using the Connect Into tool ensures that if the connection is successful. and the boiler is connected to the return piping. and click OK. 12 In the 3D view. and click Draw Pipe. select the boiler. The tool also automatically creates the appropriate fittings. 13 In the plan view. click Connector 2 : Hydronic Return : Round : 2'' : Cold Water In. 14 Right-click the grip that represents the supply connector (top). 11 In the Select Connector dialog. and the lower one is secondary. flow will propagate through the connecting pipe and be assigned to the appropriate system based on the connector to which it is connected. Plan view of return piping connection to the boiler Connect the primary base mounted pump to the boiler Two base mounted pumps are included in the system. The top base mounted pump in the plan view is primary. select the return pipe riser. The connections are automatically created.You use this tool on components with connectors to automatically create piping between the component and the existing system.

the Select Connector dialog displays prompting you to select the return or the supply connector. You can input dimensions as you draw pipe to ensure specific length segments. and click just before the midway point on the primary base mounted pump.In a plan view. for Offset. 17 Draw the piping: ■ Move the cursor to the right. enter 2'. enter 1' . Add another 2' section of pipe to the right.7''. and you select 1 connector. and press Enter. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 133 . 15 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Element panel. 16 Press Spacebar to acquire offset and pipe diameter values from the connector. ■ ■ On the Options Bar. and select Pipe Types: Standard from the Type Selector drop-down. if a component has 2 connectors that are not connected to piping. ■ Move the cursor down.

and the appropriate fittings are created. it may be helpful to switch Automatically Connect off to avoid unintended piping connections. 20 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. select the primary base mounted pump. Upgrade a fitting 23 Zoom in to the elbow fitting. as shown. 18 Press Esc twice. Notice in the 3D view that the specified offset dropped the horizontal run down.NOTE The Automatically Connect option attempts to connect piping that is positioned within a specified range. and click OK. select Connector 2 : Undefined: Round: 3''. and select it. 134 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 22 Select the last segment of pipe you drew. As you place piping runs that are close together. The pipe is automatically connected to the base mounted pump. 21 In the Select Connector dialog. 19 In the plan view.

Connect the secondary base mounted pump 25 Select the tee fitting. 28 Press Esc. and click Draw Pipe.24 Click the bottom plus symbol to upgrade the fitting from an elbow to a tee. and click to draw the pipe. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 135 . 26 Move the cursor down until the Status Bar indicates that the alignment is at the intersection of the base mounted pump. click to connect to the pump. and click the minus symbol. 27 Move the cursor to the right. you select the tee fitting. NOTE To downgrade from a tee fitting to an elbow. zoom out in the 3D view to see the new connections. right-click the bottom connector. and when the connector point displays. 29 If necessary.

select the primary base mounted pump. and click to create the pipe. 33 Press Esc. and click Draw Pipe.Connect the base mounted pumps in parallel 30 In the plan view. 136 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . right-click the discharge connector. 32 Move the cursor down until it joins the connector point on the secondary base mounted pump. for Offset. enter 4'. 31 On the Options Bar.

upgrade the fitting to a tee connector. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 137 . 3D view of parallel-connected base mounted pumps Add pipe to create a closed loop system 34 In the 3D view. as shown. zoom in to the elbow fitting on the left (secondary) base mounted pump. 35 Using the method learned previously. these pipe connections were created automatically.Notice that you do not have to draw the 2 vertical pipes to connect to the pumps.

for Offset. type 1'. 138 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . and click to create the pipe. select the tee connector in the secondary base mounted pump. right-click the bottom control on the tee. Move the cursor down until the status bar indicates that the alignment is at the intersection and vertical with the pipe shown. ■ ■ On the Options Bar. and click Draw Pipe.36 Draw pipe to connect the base mounted pipes to the return: ■ In the plan view. enter 9' 6''. and press Enter. ■ Move the cursor down.

you validate the flow through the system. and click Element Properties.37 Click Modify. right-click. Next. You now have a closed loop system. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 139 . Validate flow propagation through the supply system 38 In the plan view. select the pipe from the secondary base mounted pump to the supply pipe.

In the Instance Properties dialog. notice that the Flow Factor is a parameter that is . under Mechanical. notice that Flow is 125 GPM.39 In the Instance Properties dialog. Connect the cooling tower Next. select the following pipes: ■ Supply pipe. Flow is not currently passing through the cooling tower because it is not yet connected to the hydronic piping system. the value is 0 GPM. The flow is being propagated through the piping. and click OK. for Cooling Water Flow. view the properties for the secondary pump. as shown. The cooling tower propagates flow through the inlet and outlet connectors. 42 Click OK. 46 Press Esc. 44 In the 3D view. 43 Press Esc. under Mechanical. notice that under Mechanical. 140 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . which is rounded up to 63 GPM (1/2 of 125 GPM). 48 In the plan view. right-click.50 or 50% of the Flow. and click Element Properties. ■ Upper pipe going to the cooling tower (inlet). 40 Click Cancel. When you create the pumps in parallel. select the cooling tower. you can specify the Flow Factors for the 2 pumps as any combination that adds up to 100%. 45 In the Instance Properties dialog. 41 Using the same method. you physically connect the cooling tower piping to propagate flow. 47 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Extend drop-down ➤ Trim/Extend Multiple Elements. The Flow Factor for the primary pump is set to 50% also.

Both pipes for the cooling tower are automatically connected to the piping system. NOTE Piping colors update based on specified filters. 49 Press Esc. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 141 .■ Lower pipe (outlet).

51 Verify that the value for Cooling Water Flow is 125 GPM. and is heated by the boiler. You add a bypass valve to stop the flow and direct it to the cooling tower (cooling mode). Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open.rvt. and close the dialog. When the valve is open. you add valves to model the piping for 2 modes: cooling mode and heating mode. You also add shut-off valves to control the flow to and from the cooling tower. 142 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . and open the Instance Properties dialog to validate that the flow is propagating correctly through the cooling tower. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_05_i. click Training Files. select the cooling tower. In the left pane of the Open dialog. the water bypasses the cooling tower. 52 Close the file with or without saving it. Adding Valves In this exercise.50 In the 3D View.

4 On the Options Bar. 2 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building.Design is highlighted. 6 Click Place Pipe Accessory tab ➤ Element panel. NOTE Be careful to select a bypass valve in this step. 8 Press Esc twice. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . The bypass valve is closed by default. Adding Valves | 143 .HVAC Plan .Place a bypass valve to control flow to the cooling tower 1 In the Project Browser. as shown. and select Ball Valve .2-6 Inch Bypass : 3'' from the Type Selector drop-down.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . 5 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Accessory. Rotate the valve 9 Select the valve. indicating that it’s the active view. 7 Click the center of the pipe to place the valve. and click the top Rotate control to rotate the valve to a horizontal position. verify that the Diameter value is 3''. 3 Click the section of pipe between the supply in and supply out pipes to the cooling tower.

144 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 14 Using the same method. 13 Click to place the valve at the midpoint of the supply pipe to the cooling tower. 12 Select Ball Valve . 15 Click Place Pipe Accessory tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify.10 Press Esc.2-6 Inch Bypass : 4'' valve on the return pipe for the cooling tower. place another Ball Valve . Place shut-off valves 11 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Accessory.2-6 Inch : 4'' from the Type Selector drop-down. parallel to the previously placed valve.

Rotate both valves 16 Click the top Rotate control to the left of each valve to rotate the valve as shown. 18 In the Instance Properties dialog. For the top horizontal pipe (flow to the cooling tower).2-6 Inch : 3'' from the Type Selector drop-down. (This valve allows the water to flow through it. 19 Using the same method. validate that the Flow value is 0 GPM. and select Ball Valve . and click Element Properties.) 21 Select the 2 regular valves (in open position).2-6 Inch Bypass : 3'' from the Type Selector drop-down. You add valves to the cooling tower to enable the system to alternately run in heating mode. and select Ball Valve . right-click. and click OK. You bypass the cooling tower with hot water coming from the boiler. under Mechanical. validate that the Flow is 125 GPM. you want to shut off the flow of water into the cooling tower. Add valves to facilitate a dual mode system 17 Select the small piece of pipe above the bypass valve. Adding Valves | 145 . validate that the Flow is 125 GPM. validate the following flow values: ■ ■ ■ For the pipe below the bypass valve. For the bottom horizontal pipe (flow from the cooling tower). 20 Select the bypass valve. In heating mode. verify that Flow is 0 GPM. Modify valves to bypass the cooling tower Currently the system is designed to run in cooling mode.

146 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . as shown.Design is highlighted. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Color Schemes panel ➤ Pipe Legend. The flow coming out of the cooling tower is 0 GPM. Initially. The flow traveling through the bypass section of pipe is 125 GPM. validate the following: ■ ■ ■ The flow going into the cooling tower is 0 GPM. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. 3 Click to place the color scheme legend in the area to the right of the piping system. The color-coded display allows you to quickly see differing sizes and flow of piping. You then use a combination of friction and velocity to size the pipes appropriately. you use the pipe color scheme legend as a color-coded reference to view the flow within the pipes and the sizing. you verify automatically calculated pipe size and flow parameters. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . Display the pipe color scheme legend 1 In the Project Browser. indicating that it’s the active view. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_06_i.HVAC Plan . click Training Files.rvt.22 Using the method you just learned. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 23 Close the file with or without saving it. Sizing Pipe In this exercise.

Flow. This display will help you size the pipe using friction and velocity sizing methods. 5 Compare the legend to the color coding in the drawing to verify that the flow values are as expected. 8 Press Esc to clear the selection. Sizing Pipe | 147 . This option displays the pipes in colors based on flow values. Display the color fill based on pipe size 6 Select the Color Scheme Legend.4 In the Choose Color Scheme dialog. and click Modify Pipe Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. 7 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. select Pipe Color Fill . and click OK. for Schemes.Size. click Pipe Color Fill . and click OK.

13 Press Esc. select Friction. 11 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Duct/Pipe Sizing. 12 In the Pipe Sizing dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Sizing Method. select Larger of Connector and Calculated. press Tab 3 times (so that the status bar indicates that you’ve highlighted a branch in a pipe network up to a piece of equipment). for Branch Sizing. and enter 2. Select And. IMPORTANT The Pipe Sizing dialog displays the sizing settings that were last used. 10 Move the cursor over the pipe between the primary and secondary base mounted pumps.25 FT/100ft. 148 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . and click to select the branch. Under Constraints.Size the pipe using friction and velocity methods 9 Zoom in to the section of pipe connecting the boiler to the parallel base mounted pumps. and for Velocity. Click OK. It does not report the sizing settings of the selected pipe segment or pipe run. enter 5 FPS. The piping increases in diameter based on the friction and velocity values specified.

you use the System Inspector to inspect the Level 3 hydronic piping system. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_07_i. The System Inspector lets you inspect each piping system for flow. Inspect the system 1 In the Project Browser. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . or offset elevations are incorrect. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. 14 Close the file with or without saving it. Either relocate the system components. you can easily detect problem areas in your design and resolve them immediately.IMPORTANT Errors may occur while you are attempting to create pipe geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing. select a different layout solution. or manually modify the pipe. Inspecting the System | 149 . Using the System Inspector.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 Select the section of the return piping (magenta) between the 2 water source heat pumps on the upper level. pressure. click Training Files. The most common cause of these errors is that there is insufficient space to create the pipe. Remember to always check pipe connectivity after modification. and pressure loss by placing the cursor over a pipe or mechanical equipment that you assigned to the system. and double-click 3D HVAC Building.Design ➤ 3D Views. Inspecting the System In this exercise.

4 Click System Inspector tab ➤ System Inspector panel ➤ Inspect. NOTE To use the System Inspector to inspect flow and pressure inside pipe.3 Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ System Inspector. flow. Arrows display on the pipe indicating the flow direction for both the main and the branches in the pipe system. The pipe and the system components must be connected to a system (logical connection) and a system must contain pipe (physical connection). 150 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . An inspection flag reports the section number. NOTE Zoom in to the piping to see the arrows clearly. as required. 5 Place the cursor over the same section of return piping. The critical flow (indicated by red arrows) is in the main line going to the boiler. This information helps you modify the system design. the selected system components and pipe must be logically and physically connected. and pressure information including pressure loss.

88 psi. and the Pressure Loss is 1. select 90° F. Checking Piping Systems Revit MEP uses both the pipe geometry and the system to perform calculations such as flow and pressure.65 psi and the Pressure Loss is 1. as shown. Checking Piping Systems | 151 . the Static Pressure is 7. inspect Section 6 again. and notice that the Static Pressure is 7. targeting those systems that need attention. you use the Check Pipe Systems tool to quickly check these connections for all systems throughout your project.67 psi. and click OK.Modify fluid temperature 6 Place the cursor over the section of pipe (Section 6) between the 2 WSHPs on the lower level. Note that the Flow is 80 GPM. and to size pipe. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog. 7 Click System Inspector tab ➤ System Inspector panel ➤ Properties. 11 Close the file with or without saving it. 9 Using the same method. you need to validate them. Training File ■ Click ➤ Open. 10 Click Finish. Because both the logical (system) and physical (pipe) connections play a vital role in the overall systems design. for Fluid Temperature. In this exercise.89 psi.

4 In the System Browser. 9 Right-click CHWS. under which the mechanical equipment that was assigned to the system is listed. and for pipe sizing. After you have assigned all components to systems. For example. A dialog lets you click Show multiple times for different views.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. Revit MEP creates a default system and assigns them to it in order to perform system calculations. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . 6 In the Project Browser. Revit MEP checks both the logical (system) and the physical (pipe) connections of each piping system throughout the project. all system components must be assigned to a system after they are placed. Note that a system component may be listed in both its assigned system and in the Unassigned folder. but the same component has a sanitary system connector that you have not assigned to a system. In the System Browser.Design ➤ Floor Plans. Notice that these warnings indicate that the Default systems are not empty. Revit MEP moves them from the Unassigned folder to their assigned systems folder. The default system is placed in the Unassigned folder until you select the system components and create a system for them. Warnings display. 8 Expand Condensing Boiler: 500 MBH. Pipe geometry is used for system flow and pressure calculations. and click Show to view all of the system components. If you place components without assigning them to a system. You will check the mechanical piping components to learn how to use the System Browser to confirm specified and default system assignments. NOTE The check systems warnings contain a system type and a description. double-click Level 1 .Design. The dashed red lines represent the logical connection. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_08_i.Design. Remember that after you create pipe to physically connect a system. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . expand the Hydronic Supply folder and notice that the Condensing Boiler: 500 MBH is listed. 7 In the System Browser. 152 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . Note that only physical connections associated with an assigned system are checked. These warnings can refer to both physical connection issues (such as a disconnected or problematic pipe) or logical connection issues (such as an improperly assigned system). and you have not yet assigned the component to the other systems. Pipe that is associated with a default system (located in the Unassigned folder) is not checked.rvt. IMPORTANT The most common check systems warning is: default system is not empty. and double-click Level 3 . the water source heat pump is listed in the assigned system and assigned to the Default Hydronic Sanitary system in the Unassigned folder. notice the CHWS (Chilled Water Supply System) is listed. After you assign components to a system. As you learned when placing components. click Training Files. the pipe is associated with that system. Perform a systems check 1 In the Project Browser. Use the System Browser to confirm piping system assignments 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser.HVAC Plan .Design ➤ Floor Plans. you assigned a water source heat pump to a supply hydronic system. This occurs when the assigned system component can be connected to multiple systems (it contains different system connectors). thus assigning the components to a system. and click View.HVAC Plan . right-click the Systems titlebar. the Unassigned folder will be empty and Check Pipe Systems will no longer display not empty warnings. 5 Verify that Systems and Piping are selected. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Check Systems panel ➤ Check Pipe Systems.

15 Close the file with or without saving it. and click Select to confirm this system and the assigned system components. The return system that you created (CHWR) is listed along with the boiler and the water source heat pumps (WSHPs) that you assigned to this system. expand the Unassigned folder. 12 In the System Browser. 10 Using the same methods. confirm the system and the system assignments for the Hydronic Supply system. You have confirmed and validated both unassigned and assigned system components and their systems.HVAC Plan . 13 Right-click CHWR. you can click Show in the Show Element(s) In View dialog to switch between views. and click Expand All. 11 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Switch Windows drop-down. right-click Hydronic Return. Checking Piping Systems | 153 .Design floor plan. and confirm unassigned system components.TIP If you have multiple views open. otherwise. 14 Using the methods that you learned. and select Level 3 . click Close.

154 .

155 .Creating an Electrical System In this tutorial. you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan and design an electrical system.

156 .

Color fill plan with required lighting levels ■ Create a space lighting analysis schedule 157 .Planning an Electrical System 7 In this lesson. you complete the planning tasks associated with creating an electrical system. You learn to: ■ ■ ■ Specify electrical settings. Assign space color fills according to required lighting levels. Define required lighting.

You also add a wiring type. For Material. expand Wiring . 4 Click Add and in the Electrical Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Name. select 75. speeding up the design phase. In this exercise you review electrical settings. select 90. select Wiring Types. ■ ■ For Factor. Select Correction Factor. distribution systems. click (Open). select Copper. enter THHN. Add a wiring type 3 In the left pane. and open Imperial\RME_Elec_Planning_01_i. ■ Click New Correction Factor. ■ ■ For Material. 2 In the Electrical Settings dialog: ■ ■ In the left pane. select Copper. Revit MEP checks to ensure that components are compatible with the specified voltages and distribution systems. For Temperature Rating.Wire Sizes. For Temperature. click Training Files. wiring.Specifying Electrical Settings Electrical settings determine the voltages. In the left pane of the Open dialog. enter 1. As you place components and create circuits.04. and demand factors that are applied in the design. 158 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . Click OK.rvt. Add a correction factor 1 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Electrical Settings. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar.

■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

For Insulation, select THHN. For Max Size, enter 2000. For Neutral Multiplier, enter 1.0. Select Neutral Required. For Neutral Size, select Hot Conductor Size. For Conduit Type, select Steel.

Add a voltage definition 5 In the left pane, select Voltage Definitions. The Voltage Definitions table is used to specify a range of voltages that are used with your voltage definitions. By specifying a range, you allow circuits to be created between components with rated voltages that do not precisely match the voltage definition value. 6 Click Add and in the Electrical Settings dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■

For Name, enter 240. For Value, enter 240. For Minimum, enter 220. For Maximum, enter 250.

Add a distribution system 7 In the left pane, select Distribution Systems. Note the 3 distribution systems listed. 8 Click Add and in the Electrical settings dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

For Name, enter 120/240. For Phase, select Single. For Wires, select 3. For L-L Voltage, select 240. For L-G Voltage, select 120.

Specify demand factors 9 In the left pane, select Demand Factors. You can specify demand factors that let you adjust the rating of the main service for the building. 10 In the Electrical Settings dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

For Load Classification, select Power. Under More Than, select 10000 VA. Click Split. Select 20000 VA and for Demand Factor, enter 50. Click OK.

11 Close the file with or without saving it. Next you create a schedule to define required lighting levels. Then you assign lighting levels to spaces.

Specifying Electrical Settings | 159

Defining Required Lighting
In this exercise, you specify the lighting levels that are required for the different spaces within the building, such as offices, restrooms, and conference rooms. You begin by adding a new Project Parameter (Required Lighting Level), then you create a Key Schedule that links your new parameter to the various types of spaces in your project. Key schedules provide an efficient way to create an instance parameter that can be used to map specific parameter values to particular key styles. In this case the key style is the type of space and, because the key is linked to your new project parameter, its value becomes the Required Lighting Level. Later in the tutorial, you will use the new parameter again to compare the value for Required Lighting Level against the actual illumination provided by fixtures that you place in the plan. Training File
■ ■

On the Quick Access toolbar, click

(Open).

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\RME_Elec_Planning_02_i.rvt.

Add a project parameter for lighting 1 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Parameters. 2 In the Project Parameters dialog, click Add. 3 In the Parameter Properties dialog, under Parameter Data:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

For Name, enter Required Lighting Level. For Discipline, select Electrical. For Type of Parameter, select Illuminance. For Group Parameter Under, select Electrical - Lighting. Under Categories, select Spaces. Verify that Instance is selected. Click OK twice. The Required Lighting Level project parameter has been added and will appear as an instance parameter for all spaces, under the Electrical - Lighting group in the space element properties.

Verify the new parameter 4 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Lighting - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click Level 2 - Lighting Plan. 5 In the drawing area, zoom in on the lower left corner and use the crosshair as a guide to select Space 218.

6 Click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.

160 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System

7 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Electrical - Lighting, note the Required Lighting Level parameter. Click OK. Create a schedule for required lighting levels 8 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Schedules drop-down ➤ Schedule/Quantities. 9 In the New Schedule dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■

For Category, select Spaces. For Name, enter Space Lighting Requirements. Select Schedule Keys, and for Key Name, enter Lighting Levels. Click OK.

10 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog, under Available Fields, double-click Required Lighting Level, and click OK. The schedule displays and includes a title and column headings. 11 Double-click the column boundary to the right of each column to adjust the column to fit the text.

Add space lighting requirements to the schedule table 12 Click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ New. 13 In the Key Name column of the first row, enter Open Office. 14 In the first row of the Required Lighting Level column, enter 45. 15 Adjust the column boundaries as needed.

16 Click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ New to add 13 more rows. 17 Complete the table by entering the following:

The fc value is automatically applied as the parameter is based upon illuminance parameter type, which is mapped to project units. Notice that as you enter the data, the rows are automatically sorted by Key Name. You can change the sort/grouping to sort by Required Lighting Level.

Defining Required Lighting | 161

Change the sort order of the schedule 18 Right-click in the schedule and click View Properties. 19 In the Instance Properties dialog, for Sorting/Grouping, click Edit. 20 In the Schedule Properties dialog:
■ ■

For Sort By, select Required Lighting Level. Select Blank Line.

21 Click OK twice. The entries in the schedule are sorted by Required Lighting Level.

22 Using the same method, change the sort order back to the default setting. The entries in the schedule are sorted by Key Name. Apply a lighting level to spaces 23 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting - Design ➤ Floor Plans and open Level 2 - Lighting Plan. 24 Zoom to Space 218 and select the space element.

25 Click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Note that under Electrical-Lighting, that Required Lighting Level is blank. 26 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Identity Data, for Lighting Levels, select Instruction-Standard. Notice that the Required Lighting Level now has a value of 50 fc and the field is dimmed, since the Lighting Level is set to use the value assigned to the Instruction-Standard key value. The

162 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System

only way to change the value is to either select a different Lighting Level key, select None for Lighting Level and type a specific value, or edit the Required Lighting Level key schedule for the selected key. Since Required Lighting Level is an instance parameter, the value input applies only to the selected space. 27 Click OK. You can apply a key schedule to multiple spaces at the same time by selecting the spaces and specifying the lighting levels in the Electrical properties dialog.

28 Close the file with or without saving it. Next you create a color fill scheme for space lighting.

Creating Color Fills and Schedules
Revit MEP lets you add color fills to spaces based on specific space parameters. Space color fill plans and schedules can be helpful as design tools and as design communications documents. In this exercise, you will create a space color fill plan using the lighting levels that you specified in the previous exercise. Space color fills can be used with any parameter that exists for the space components. Later in this exercise, you create a space lighting analysis schedule to aid in the layout of your lighting design. The schedule includes a calculated lighting delta value, which is the difference between the required and the calculated illuminance values. Training File
■ ■

On the Quick Access toolbar, click

(Open).

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\RME_Elec_Planning_03_i.rvt.

Create a color fill legend scheme 1 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel drop-down ➤ Color Schemes. 2 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog:
■ ■

Under Schemes, for Category, select Spaces. Under Schemes, click (Duplicate).

3 In the New Color Scheme dialog, for Name, enter Required Lighting and click OK. 4 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog:
■ ■

Under Scheme Definition, for Title, enter Required Lighting Levels. For Color, select Required Lighting Level, and click OK to dismiss the alert message.

5 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog:

Under Scheme Definition, verify the By Range is selected.

Creating Color Fills and Schedules | 163

Select the scheme for At Least 20.00 fc, and click (Add Value). This command adds a new value based on the split value of the unit you are adding the new value after. For example, if you select the value for 20 fc and click Add, then the new value will be 40 fc. If you select the value for 20 fc again and click Add, then the new value will be 30 fc or half of the difference between the two values you are adding.

With the scheme for At Least 20. 00 fc still selected, click

(Add Value) again.

Select the scheme for At Least 40.00 fc, and click

(Add Value).

■ ■ ■

Select the scheme for 30.00 fc, and click

(Add Value).

Select the scheme for 50.00 fc, enter 75.00, and press ENTER. Select the scheme for 40.00 fc, enter 50.00, and press ENTER.

Click OK.

Add a legend and apply the color scheme 6 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Lighting - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click Level 2 - Lighting CF. 7 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel ➤ Legend. 8 In the drawing area, click to place the legend to the right of the drawing. 9 In the Choose Space Type and Color Scheme dialog:
■ ■ ■

For Space Type, select Spaces. For Color Scheme, select Required Lighting. Click OK.

The color fill plan displays the required illuminance levels based on the key values previously created.

164 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System

Create a space lighting analysis schedule 10 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Schedules drop-down ➤ Schedule/Quantities. 11 In the New Schedule dialog:
■ ■

For Category, select Spaces. For Name, enter Space Lighting Analysis and click OK.

12 In the Schedule Properties dialog, for Available Fields, double-click Number, Name, Level, Average Estimated Illumination, and Required Lighting Level. 13 Click Calculated Value. 14 In the Calculated Value dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■

For Name, enter Lighting Delta. For Discipline, select Electrical. For Type, select Illuminance. For Formula, click Browse.
■ ■

In the Fields dialog, select Average Estimated Illumination. Click OK.

In the Calculated Value dialog, for Formula, at the end of Average Estimated Illumination, press the spacebar, type a hyphen, and click Browse.
■ ■

In the Fields dialog, select Required Lighting Level. Click OK twice.

15 In the Schedule Properties dialog:
■ ■ ■

On the Sorting/Grouping tab, for Sort by, select Level. Select Header. Select Blank Line. On the Formatting tab, for Fields, select Lighting Delta. Click Conditional Format.

In the Conditional Formatting dialog, under Condition, for Test, select Not Between.

Creating Color Fills and Schedules | 165

Click Background Color. 166 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . enter -5 fc and 5 fc. Click OK three times.■ ■ For Value. ■ ■ In the Color dialog. for Custom Colors. select Red. The lighting delta values that are not within the conditional value of -5 fc and 5 fc are highlighted in red. 16 Close the file with or without saving it.

First.Designing an Electrical System 8 In this lesson. These values are based on internal lighting level calculations which use the space floor and wall reflectance values and workplane height to automatically calculate average illuminance or lighting levels. Create a panel schedule. Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills In this exercise. you modify the color plan to illustrate the space by the Average Estimated Illumination values. power circuits. You learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Add devices and fixtures using schedule to satisfy required lighting levels. Use the System Browser to check your design. as you place lighting fixtures. Create power loads. 167 . you verify illuminance values to indicate when the lighting level requirements have been satisfied. you create electrical systems (including lighting circuits. you place lighting fixtures in the drawing. Then. Create circuits (with and without wire) to create the logical connections between devices and fixtures. Balance wire sizes and breaker service. using the color fill plan and the space analysis schedule as an aid in lighting placement to satisfy required lighting levels. and switch systems) by establishing logical connections between electrical components.

and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_01_i. click Training Files. select the color legend.rvt. we can quickly identify those areas of the building that do not meet the specified lighting requirements. for the Spaces Category. select Average Estimated Illumination. click (Open).00 fc. 2 In the drawing area. 4 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog: ■ Under Schemes. 3 Click Modify Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. You can create additional color schemes. then modify the color scheme legend to use the color fill plan as a design tool for many tasks. By using orange as the color for this range. ■ ■ ■ 5 Click OK. select Orange.Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. Click OK. Under Scheme Definition. In the Color dialog.Lighting Color Fill view is open. Notice that the Library has an average estimated illumination less than 20. 168 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . select the color for Less Than 20.00 fc. 6 Press ESC to deselect the legend. for Basic Colors. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Modify the color fill plan 1 Verify that the Level 2 .

Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 169 . which is the lowest value in the specified range. 17 Click Place Fixture tab ➤ Placement panel ➤ Place on Face.5 fc range. with the last activated window appearing in the upper-left corner.277. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting . indicating a value greater than 0 fc. the illumination values in the color fill plan and schedule analysis will automatically update. however the color fill plan can display within the range below the specified value because of the +/. Windows are arranged in a counter-clockwise order.Lighting Ceiling plan.5 fc range is satisfied. The schedule indicates the Average Estimated Illumination as yellow for values of 0 fc (conditional format). The red field will clear once the +/.Lighting Ceiling Plan view to make it active. 11 Click the Space Lighting Analysis view to make it active. The colors will coincide with the values in the color fill legend.5 fc range specified in the conditional format of this field. 16 Click Place Fixture tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select Recessed Parabolic Light: 2’x2’ (2 Lamp) . Add fixtures 14 In the drawing area. expand Schedule/Quantities and open the Space Lighting Analysis view. All of this works as a visual aid for the designer to insure design requirements are met.7 In the Project Browser. 13 Click the Level 2 . 8 In the Project Browser. The color fill will change colors as lighting fixtures are placed that raise the illumination level above 20 fc. zoom to space Library 219. The color fill plan also indicates in orange an illumination value below 20 fc. 12 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 10 Click the Level 2 Color Fill_Lighting Plan view to make it active. Note that the lighting delta can be cleared. As you add lighting fixtures to the Library. The order of the tiled windows is determined by the order in which the windows were activated. and the Lighting Delta as red for values out of the +/.277VM_Plain Recessed Lighting Fixture 600x600 .Design ➤ Ceiling Plans and open the Level 2 . As you add lighting fixtures to the Library. 15 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Lighting Fixture. all three of these colored fields will clear to white. 9 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile.

25 On the Options Bar. the lighting delta and average estimated illumination for space Library 219 are updated. 21 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. the fixtures will move accordingly. 24 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy.The Place on Face option allows the fixtures to be hosted by the ceiling plan. 20 Select the lighting fixture. verify that the option for Calculate Coefficient of Utilization is selected. select Multiple. so that as the ceiling plan moves vertically. 18 Click to place the fixture. NOTE This option must be selected in order for lighting information to be updated in the color fill plan and schedule. 19 Press ESC to end the command. In the Space Lighting Analysis view. 26 Use the Copy command to place 2 more fixtures as shown. 170 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 22 In the Instance Properties dialog. 23 Click OK.

27 Press ESC to end the command. 29 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. select the 3 fixtures. Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 171 . 31 Click in the drawing area to place 6 additional groups of fixtures as shown.NOTE Object snaps are used for selecting intersections of the ceiling grid. 30 On the Options Bar. 28 In the drawing area. select Multiple.

172 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .32 Press ESC. The values in the Space Lighting Analysis view are updated automatically. Note the value in red for the space Library 219. Modify multiple fixture instances 34 Select the vertical center group of light fixtures. 33 Click to activate the Schedule window.

277V. click Check None. and for Category. 36 In the Filter dialog. Click OK. select Lighting Fixtures. 37 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select Recessed Parabolic Light: 2’x4’ (2 Lamp) .35 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 173 .

Note the changes for the space Library 219. 38 Click to activate the Color Fill_Lighting Plan view.The values in the schedule are updated automatically. 174 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .

39 Repeat the previous steps to change the same group of fixtures to Recessed Parabolic Light: 2’x4’ (3 Lamp) .277V. select Multiple Alignment. 41 On the Options Bar. The lighting delta is satisfied. 40 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Align. Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 175 . click the ceiling grid line as shown. 42 In the drawing area. Note the changes for the space Library 219.

44 Repeat the previous step to align the remaining fixtures. 176 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . The fixture aligns.43 Click the left edge of the first fixture.

In the next exercise. Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures | 177 . Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 46 Close the file with or without saving it. click Training Files.rvt. you modify the light fixture IES files.45 Press ESC to end the command. click (Open). you modify the IES data of the light fixtures with the goal of maximizing the lighting output using the fewest number of fixtures. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_02_i. Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures In this exercise.

Create a new lighting fixture type 1 In the Project Browser. Note the Average Estimated Illumination value of 46 fc. Expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans and open Level 2 . 3 In the Space Lighting Analysis schedule view. 5 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 178 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 2 Tile the views as shown.Design ➤ Floor Plans and open the Level 2 .Lighting Plan. zoom to space Library 219 and select the lighting fixture shown. scroll to view space space Library 219. 6 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ Click Edit Type. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting . 4 In the Level 2 Lighting Plan view.Lighting Color Fill plan. Expand Schedules/Quantities and open Space Lighting Analysis.

for Name enter 2’x4’ (3 Lamp) T5_HO_54W .277V and click OK. for Lamp. enter . ■ In the Initial Color dialog. Apply the lighting fixture type 8 Select all the fixtures in the center column in the Library as shown. specify 15000.00 VA. Under Photometrics. ■ Under Photometrics. Note the lighting type has changed to F14. for Color Preset.00 lm. Under Identity Data. for Type Mark. In the Select File dialog. enter 162. select 463T5_S. Note that in the Space Lighting Analysis Schedule.■ In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ Click Duplicate. ■ ■ ■ In the Light Loss Factor dialog. select T5 [HO]. for Apparent Load. enter . click the value for Initial Color. 7 Press ESC to deselect the fixture. click the value for Photometric Web File and click Browse. for Ballast Loss Factor. In the Name dialog. and click OK. Under Photometrics. click the value for Light Loss Factor. enter F15.ies and click Open. ■ Click OK twice. Click OK. ■ ■ ■ ■ In the Initial Intensity dialog. ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Electrical Loads. select Luminous Flux. Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures | 179 . the Lighting Delta for the Library is updated.85. Under Photometrics.93. select Xenon and click OK. ■ Click Apply. For Luminaire Dirt Depreciation. click the value for Initial Intensity. Under Electrical.

277V.9 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. select Lighting Fixtures. click Check None. 180 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 11 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select 2’x4’ (3 Lamp) T5_HO_54W . 12 Press ESC to deselect the fixtures. Click OK. Remove lighting fixtures 13 Select the 3 lighting fixtures in the center column of the Library as shown. 10 In the Filter dialog. Note that the selected lighting fixtures have been updated. and for Category. and that the lighting delta for the Library in the Space Lighting Analysis Schedule also has been updated.

select the top center fixture.Press Delete. 16 Click the other fixtures in the center to apply the fixture type. Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures | 181 . 15 In space Library 219. Note the lighting delta updates again. Apply the fixture type to other fixtures 14 Click Modify tab ➤ Clipboard panel ➤ Match Type.

Remove lighting fixtures 18 Select the 2 lighting fixtures as shown. 182 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .17 Click Match Fixtures tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. Note that the lighting delta for the Library has been updated again.

19 Close the file with or without saving it. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Placing Switches. Placing Switches. In the next exercise. and Receptacles In this exercise you add switches for the lighting switches and the receptacles in your project. The lighting delta has been updated and is now 0. you add switches.Press Delete. click Training Files. Junction Boxes. junction boxes. and Receptacles | 183 . click (Open). and receptacles to your design. 2 In the drawing area. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar.rvt. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. The procedure for placing switches and receptacles is the same as for placing any hosted components in Revit MEP. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_03_i. Junction Boxes. Place lighting switches 1 Verify that the Level 2 Lighting Plan view is open.

277V. 5 Click Place Lighting Device tab ➤ Placement tab ➤ Place on Vertical Face. 6 Position the switch on the interior wall as shown. 184 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . it is only previewed when the cursor is over a wall. 4 Click Place Lighting Device tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select Wall Occupancy Sensor .Regular Voltage: Passive Infrared . Because the switch requires a wall to serve as the host. 7 Click to place the switch.3 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Lighting.

browse to Revit MEP ➤ Imperial Library ➤ Electrical Components ➤ Power Devices.rfa and click Open.NoLoad: 4” Square is selected in the Type Selector.8 Place a second switch of the same type on the other side of the wall as shown. 13 Position the junction box in space Computer Lab 222 as shown. Place junction boxes 10 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Electrical Fixture. 11 Click Place Devices tab ➤ Model panel ➤ Load Family. and Receptacles | 185 . Junction Boxes. Placing Switches. 9 Press ESC to end the command. The element type Junction Boxes .NoLoad. 12 In the Load Family dialog. Select Junction Boxes .

15 Select the junction box.Offset. note that Apparent Load is set to 0. Click OK twice.14 Press ESC to end the command. 16 Click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.Design ➤ Floor Plans and open the Level 2 Power Plan view. note the Number of Poles is 1. 186 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . In the Type Properties dialog. Place wall-hosted receptacles 19 In the Project Browser. NOTE When entering values. Click Edit Type. 18 Press ESC to deselect the junction box. 17 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ Under Constraints. Under Electrical. enter JB-1NL. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. zoom to space Library 219. for Mark. 21 In the drawing area. enter 9’0”. you can enter a space to separate the unit values. 20 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Close Hidden to close other views that may be open. for Level 2 . expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Power .

26 In the System Browser. dock the System Browser at the bottom of your window. and Receptacles | 187 . and Voltage. Right-click the column heading again and click View ➤ Electrical. Distribution System.22 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. and Number of Elements. Expand Electrical. This list displays connectors and circuits that have not been assigned to a panel. 24 For any column. Click OK. Space Number. 25 In the Column Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click Check None. Note that the values for the space Library 219 are currently blank. right-click and click Column Settings. Placing Switches. 23 In the System Browser. Select Load. right-click the a column heading and click View ➤ Systems. Junction Boxes. NOTE If necessary. expand Unassigned and scroll space Library 219. Expand General. Select Size. Space Name.

28 Click Place Devices tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select Duplex Receptacle: Standard. 33 Position the cursor on the Move Witness Line grip as shown.27 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Electrical Fixture. 31 Close the System Browser. 188 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 34 Drag the grip to move the witness line to the receptacle on the left as shown. 29 Click to place 2 receptacles in space Library 219 as shown. 30 Scroll the System Browser to see the added receptacles. 35 Select the dimension and enter 12’. Reposition the receptacle 32 Select the receptacle on the right.

Place additional receptacles 37 Repeat the previous steps to place a third receptacle in space Library 219 as shown. 39 Click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 36 Press ESC to deselect the receptacle. Junction Boxes. 38 Select the receptacle. Placing Switches. 40 On the Options Bar. and Receptacles | 189 . select Copy and Multiple.The receptacle on the right is repositioned according to the dimension you enter.

move the cursor along the wall. 42 Move the cursor down. 190 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .41 Click the midpoint of the receptacle. enter 12’ and press ENTER to place another receptacle. and enter 12’ and press ENTER.

and Receptacles | 191 .43 Press ESC to end the command. Placing Switches. Junction Boxes.

45 Click Place Device tab ➤ Element panel drop-down and select Duplex Receptacle: Standard. 47 Click to place 3 floor receptacles as shown.Place floor-hosted receptacles 44 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Electrical Fixture. 192 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 46 Click Place Devices tab ➤ Placement panel ➤ Place on Face.

Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire In this exercise you add the electrical equipment for the distribution systems in your plan. The following diagram shows the connectivity for your electrical Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 193 . Next you create lighting circuits and show wire. Although the connections between this type of equipment are not typically shown on plans. you need to create logical connections to define the topology.48 Close the file with or without saving it.

then create lighting circuitry and add wiring as the circuits are created. Add panelboards 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan view is open. You start at the low voltage panels (L-1 and L-2). 2 In the drawing area. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. Adding wiring to a project is optional.equipment.rvt. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_04_i. 3 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Electrical Equipment. click (Open). zoom to the space Electrical 220. click Training Files. 194 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . and work toward the higher voltage. In this exercise you also become more familiar with the wiring settings. In the left pane of the Open dialog. main distribution panels (H-2 and MDP).

11 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Electrical . select 480/277 Wye. For Panel Name. 7 Press ESC to end the command. 14 Select the panelboard. 9 On the Options Bar.4 Click Place Equipment tab ➤ Element panel drop-down and select 208V MCB Lighting and Appliance Panelboard . select 120/208 Wye. 12 Press ESC to deselect the panelboard. for Distribution System. 10 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. enter PP-2B.Surface: 100A. 13 Repeat the previous steps to place a 480V MCB Lighting and Appliance Panelboard .Loads. 16 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.Surface: 100A panelboard as shown. enter 20. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 195 . Click OK. 15 On the Options Bar. 8 Select the panelboard. for Distribution System. for Max. #1 Pole Breakers. 6 Click to place the panelboard as shown. 5 Click Place Equipment tab ➤ Placement Panel ➤ Place on Vertical Face.

20 In the drawing area. 22 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. enter LP-2B. click Check None. enter 20. select Lighting Devices and Lighting Fixtures. ■ 18 Press ESC to deselect the panelboard. 24 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Power. 196 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . Note that Apparent Load Phases are dimmed because they are calculated values. which is the logical connection between the elements. 21 Select all fixtures and switches in the space. Click OK. for Max.17 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Electrical . zoom to space Instruction 221. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans and open Level 2 Lighting Plan view. Click OK. #1 Pole Breakers. 23 In the Filter dialog. and for Category.Loads. For Panel Name. The blue sketch graphics show the created circuit. Add a circuit with wire 19 In the Project Browser.

27 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. The red sketch graphics show the logical circuit with the home run pointing toward the selected panel. 26 Select lighting panel LP-2B. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 197 .25 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Select Panel.

32 Press ESC. 31 Click to place the switch in the drawing area as shown. 33 Select the switch on the right. 198 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . Add a switch 29 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Lighting.28 Press ESC to end the command. 30 Click Lighting Place Device tab ➤ Element panel drop-down and select Lighting Switches: Three Way.

right-click the connector and click Add to Circuit. 35 Select the left three-way switch. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 199 .34 Click Place Device tab ➤ Element panel and select Lighting Switches: Three Way from the Type Selector drop-down. 36 Click the top-left lighting fixture to add to the circuit.

Loads. Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire This exercise is similar to the previous exercise in that you create circuits. Next you create circuits without showing wire. 38 Press ESC to end the command. 42 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. select Wires. 200 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . Training File ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. 44 Close the file with or without saving it. 41 In the Filter dialog. 40 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. Click OK. Note that the tick marks are updated to show 4. Click OK. for Hot Conductors. 39 Select all items in space Instruction 221. except without wire. 43 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Electrical . click Check None.37 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. enter 2. click (Open). and for Category.

and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_05_i. 5 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. right-click on the Systems heading. expand Power. Click OK. Voltage. 2 In the drawing area. 7 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-right and the lighting sensor. 4 Right-click the connector and click Create Power Circuit. 3 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-left of the space. and then expand circuit 1. Add a circuit without wire 1 Verify that the Level 2 Lighting Plan view is open. and Voltage Drop are selected. 9 Select panel LP-2B in space Electrical 220. 6 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Add To Circuit. and verify that Load. ■ 16 In the System Browser. Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire | 201 . Distribution System. 17 Scroll down and expand LP-2B. 8 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Select Panel. Rating. 10 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. Check circuits 11 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. 15 In the Column Settings dialog: ■ ■ Expand General and review the settings. 12 Move the System Browser pane to the bottom of the screen for easier viewing. 14 Right-click on the Systems heading and click Column Settings. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. Expand Electrical. and click View ➤ Systems and Electrical. click Training Files.rvt. 13 In the System Browser.

30 Close the System Browser. 27 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. right-click the connector and click Add to Circuit. 29 Move the cursor over one of the fixtures and press TAB 3 times to view the circuit.Note the circuit in space Instruction 221. 25 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Add To Circuit. View circuit information 24 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. 26 Select the 4 remaining lighting fixtures and the other occupancy sensor in space Computer Lab 222. The System Browser also provides the name and number of the space in which the devices are located. Click OK. change the Voltage to 277V. 20 Select the junction box and click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 22 With the junction box still selected. Note the addition of the junction box to circuit 2 in the System Browser. The System Browser is a useful tool for checking the design and locating components in your project. 23 Move the cursor over one of the adjacent fixtures and click to select it. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. 28 Select one of the occupancy sensors. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. Add additional devices to the circuit 19 In the drawing area. 202 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . The System Browser provides another way of viewing information about the circuits that are connected to a panel. under Electrical. 18 Expand circuit 2 and note the devices.

Add tags to fixtures 31 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. enter FR4. 34 Click each of the 6 lighting fixtures in space Computer Lab 222. 46 Click Place Label tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ Horizontal ➤ Center and Vertical ➤ Top. 38 In the Instance Properties dialog. 44 In the Edit Label dialog. click Edit Type. Click OK. 36 Select the upper-left fixture. 40 Click OK twice. click below the first one to place it. note the label parameters and click Cancel. Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire | 203 . 47 In the drawing area. 45 Click Modify Label tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Similar. 37 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 33 In the Tags dialog: ■ ■ For Lighting Fixtures. 32 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Deselect Leader. under Identity Data. 35 Press ESC to end the command. 41 Press ESC to deselect the fixture. select Lighting Fixture Tag: Standard. 39 In the Type Properties dialog. Edit tags 42 Select a tag and click Modify Lighting Fixture Tags tab ➤ Family panel ➤ Edit Family. Notice that all 6 lighting fixture tags are updated. 43 Select the label name and click Modify Label tab ➤ Label panel ➤ Edit Label. Click Yes. Click Tags. for Type Mark.

Add tags to remaining fixtures 54 Select all the elements in space Computer Lab 222. select Lighting_Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag: Standard and click Apply. 50 Drag the handle on the right side of the tag to resize it by dragging it to the left. enter a comma. 57 Click Modify Lighting Fixture tab ➤ Element panel ➤ and select Lighting_Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag: Standard. Click OK. 49 Click Place Label tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. For Circuit Number. Click OK. Deselect Break and for Suffix. enter Lighting Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag. Click OK. 51 Click ➤ Save As ➤ Family. Note the tags are updated in the drawing area. 58 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag All. 59 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. 55 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Wrap between parameters only.48 In the Edit Label dialog: ■ Under Category Parameters. 56 In the Filter dialog. 204 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . Click Apply and note the label parameters are divided into 2 lines in the drawing area. Next you create a switch system. 60 Zoom out to see the tagged fixtures.rfa. 61 Close the file with or without saving it. Note the tag is updated in the drawing area. for File Name. and for Category. select Circuit Number and Switch ID and click Add parameter(s) to label . and click Apply. Click Save. select Break. Creating a Switch System In this exercise you learn how to create a switch system. 53 Click Create tab ➤ Family Editor panel ➤ Load into Project. 52 In the Save As dialog. select Lighting Fixture Tags. click Check None.

4 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Switch. Click OK. for Switch ID. 10 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Finish Editing System. click Training Files. click (Open). enter a. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. Note that the lighting fixture tags for the two fixtures are updated with the Switch ID. 5 Click Modify Switch System tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Switch System. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_06_i. 9 Select the occupancy sensor. Create a switch system 1 Verify that the Level 2 Lighting Plan view is open. 7 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-right of the space.rvt. 6 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Add to System. 12 Select the occupancy sensor. 14 In the Instance Properties dialog. 3 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-left of the space. 2 In the drawing area. 11 Highlight the fixture and press TAB 4 times to see the switch system. under Electrical Lighting. 13 Click Modify Lighting Devices tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. 8 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Select Switch. Creating a Switch System | 205 .

16 Select one of the lighting fixtures below the wall. under Electrical . Click OK. enter b. 206 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 25 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Finish Editing System. 21 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Select Switch. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. 17 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Switch. 22 Select the occupancy sensor on the bottom side of the wall. 23 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Switch Properties. for switch ID. 20 Select the remaining 3 lighting fixtures. 19 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Add to System.Lighting. 18 Click Modify Switch Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Switch System. Note the lighting fixture tags for the 4 fixtures below the wall are updated with the switch ID.15 Press ESC to deselect the occupancy sensor.

click Check None. Creating Power Loads | 207 . Creating Power Loads In this exercise you will learn methods for creating power circuits (circuit groups). 6 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. 7 In space Electrical 220. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 5 Click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Power. Circuits are used for power. Add a circuit 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan view is open.26 Close the file with or without saving it. select Electrical Fixtures. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_07_i. click (Open).rvt. Click OK. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. 4 In the Filter dialog. click Training Files. The concept of grouping similar functions into systems is used to show logical connections between different components in the system. 2 In the drawing area. and for Category. select the PP-2B panel. 3 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. lighting. Next you create a circuit and size wire. zoom to space Instruction 221 and draw a pick box to select all the components in the space. and data systems.

14 Click Insert tab ➤ Load from Library panel ➤ Load Family. 12 Press ESC to deselect the wire. click the minus symbol to delete a tick mark. and click Element Properties. 9 Press ESC to deselect the wires. 208 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .8 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. navigate to Imperial Library ➤ Electrical Components ➤ TickMarks. for Hot Conductors. enter 2. 11 In the Instance Properties dialog. 16 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Electrical Settings. and in the right pane. select Long Wire Tick Mark. select Hook Wire Tick Mark. Notice the 3 tick marks is changed to 4 tickmarks. 17 In the left pane of the Electrical Settings dialog. 10 Right-click the wire for the home run to the panel. for Ground Wire Tick Mark. Click OK. 19 Click OK.rfa. under Electrical . select Wiring.Loads. and click Open. 15 In the Load Family dialog. 18 For Neutral Wire Tick Mark. select Hook Wire Tick Mark. and in the drawing area. 13 Select the wire again.

The tick mark for all ground conductors are changed to a hooked tick marks and neutral conductors display as a long tick mark. as shown. press Tab to display a preview of the circuit wiring. 24 Press ESC to deselect the wires. 22 In space Electrical 220. select the PP-2B panel. 23 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. and click to select the circuit. Creating Power Loads | 209 . 21 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. Combine multiple homeruns into a multi-circuit homerun 20 Highlight one of the receptacles in space Computer Lab 222. 25 Select the homerun from space Computer Lab 222 and the wire between the first and second receptacle in space Instruction 221.

29 In space Instruction 221. click the connector of the first receptacle. add another wire between the connector on the last receptacle in 221. click a point halfway between the first and second receptacle to create an arc.26 Press Delete. and then click the connector of the second receptacle as shown. There are only 3 tick marks 210 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 27 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Wire drop-down ➤ Arc. 28 In the drawing area. Notice that there are now 4 tick marks on the homerun and the wiring for space Instruction 221 and a double arrowhead to indicate the multi-circuit homeruns. in space Instruction 221. as shown. and the connector on the nearest receptacle in space Computer Lab 222.

Balancing loads begins with adjusting the loads at the panels farthest from the power source. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_08_i. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. 2 In the drawing area. and connect its wiring to a receptacle in space Instruction 221. Circuit loads should be balanced to present as nearly as possible an equal load to each phase. click Open. select panel LP-2B. 3 In the Electrical space. zoom to space Electrical 220. 31 Close the file with or without saving it.on the wiring that extends to the space Computer Lab 222. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. Balancing Wire Size and Breaker Service | 211 . An additional hot conductor is added to the 221 wiring. Balancing Wire Size and Breaker Service In this exercise you begin by balancing the loads at the Level 1 and Level 2 panels. you verify and adjust wire sizes that Revit MEP recommends for handling the loads on those circuits. Balance circuit loads 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan is open. Finally. then you examine the loads presented at the panels to set your final breaker sizes. Next you balance the loads for your design. This will reduce neutral current as well as prevent an excess voltage drop due to one phase being overloaded. 30 Add wiring to space Electrical 220. Notice the triple arrowhead for the homerun.rvt.

1-#10. 5 In the Edit Circuits dialog. 10 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. enter 30A. Phase B 3636 VA. for Rating. Notice that the loads on Phase A. Revit MEP automatically calculates wire sizes based on circuit rating. 1-#12. 14 Close the warning dialog. and Phase C . B. Under Electrical-Loads. click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Circuit Properties. A warning indicates that the power system is empty and will be deleted. 1-#10. 6 Click OK.3616 VA). click Rebalance Loads. while Phase B provides 2004 VA. Verify and adjust wire sizes 7 With panel LP-2B still selected.3712 VA.4 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Circuits. and Phase C provides 2028 VA. 212 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . The loads are now more evenly distributed over the three phases (Phase A . ■ ■ Adjust circuit breaker sizes 9 Select panel PP-2B. 11 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Remove from Circuit. 13 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. and note the value for the Wire Size parameter is now 3-#10. Scroll down. Click OK. and C shows an imbalance with the heaviest load 6932 VA on Phase A. 12 Select panel PP-2B. 1-#12. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog for the circuit: ■ ■ Scroll down and note the current value for the Wire Size parameter is 3-#12.

and click OK. 16 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Power.Loads. 21 With panel PP-2B still selected. 22 In the Instance Properties dialog for the circuit. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_09_i. click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. The circuit breaker size for panel PP-2B is now sized to handle the connected load. for Rating. click Training Files. you create a panel schedule report for panelboard MDP-1. Create the panel schedule report 1 Verify that the Level 1 Power Plan is open. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. under Electrical . under Electrical . 3 In the Select Panels dialog: ■ ■ ■ Click Clear Selection. Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties.15 Select panel PP-2B. 18 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports and Schedules panel ➤ Panel Schedule. 26 Close the file with or without saving it. Creating a Panel Schedule In this exercise. 25 Press ESC to deselect the panel. enter 30A. The Panel Schedule Report appears in a new window. 23 With panel PP-2B still selected.Loads.rvt. for Rating. 20 Click OK to close the warning dialog. 19 In the Instance Properties dialog for the circuit. and click OK. Select PP-2B. 24 Select the transformer TP-2B. Panel PP-2B is now reconnected to transformer TP-2B. A warning indicates that the total connected load exceeds 80% of the defined value of 20A for the circuit you are creating. click (Open). Next you create a panel schedule. enter 25A. Creating a Panel Schedule | 213 . 17 Close the warning dialog. Click OK.

under Other. Under Body Text. for Font. 10 In the Panel Report Appearance dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Header Text. click Training Files. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. 4 Close the report. and open E601 . This dialog allows you to control how the panel schedule report displays when it is included on a sheet. the panel will not appear in the Select Panels dialog. expand Sheets (all). The System Browser is a useful tool for checking the design and locating components in your project. The Panel Report Appearance dialog displays.NOTE If a panel schedule has already been created for a panel. 8 Click Modify Schedule Graphics tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties. under Reports ➤ Panel Schedule. click Edit. 11 Click OK twice. 9 In the Instance Properties dialog. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 5 In the Project Browser. Next you use the System Browser to check your design. You also learn to use the Check Circuits tool to verify that all of the circuits in your plan are connected. enter 3/32. 214 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . click (Open). select Bold and Italic. for Appearance. drag PP-2B onto the sheet.Panel Schedules. 6 In the Project Browser. for Font Size. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_10_i. for Font Size. Checking Your Design In this exercise you learn how to use the System Browser to examine the circuitry that you created in previous exercises. enter 1/8. select Berlin Sans FB. 12 Close the file with or without saving it. Under Header Text. 7 Select the schedule.rvt. Under Header Text.

Notice that the receptacle on the right side wall is not connected to circuit 2. and then click the receptacle to select the circuit. select space Lounge 212. 12 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. 7 Move the cursor over the receptacle on the right side wall and press TAB once. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. 3 Move the System Browser to the bottom of the drawing area. Expand Power ➤ PP-2C ➤ circuit 2.View unassigned components 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan is open. and click AutoFit All Columns to resize the columns in the System Browser. notice that PP-2C for circuit 2 is updated. Checking Your Design | 215 . Check circuits 13 Click Analyze tab ➤ Check Systems panel ➤ Check Circuits. Expand Unassigned. note that the receptacle is not connected to any circuit. 6 Move the cursor over the receptacle on the bottom wall and press TAB once. ■ ■ 5 In the drawing area. 4 In the System Browser: ■ Right-click a column heading. In the System Browser. The System Browser provides another way of viewing information about the circuits that are connected to panel PP-2C. 11 Select the receptacle on the right side wall. The System Browser also provides the name and number of the space in which the devices are located. each with a load of 180VA. 9 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. press TAB once. In the System Browser. There are 4 devices connected to circuit 2. Note the receptacle in space Lounge 212. 8 Move the cursor over the receptacle on the bottom wall. 10 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Add to Circuit.

14 In the warning window that is displayed indicating an unconnected power connector. under Warnings. 216 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 16 Close the details dialog. for Panel. click (Expand warning dialog) to view details of the warning. 20 On the Options Bar. 18 Select panel LP-2C. 19 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Systems Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. 17 In the drawing area. Panel LP-2C is now connected to the main distribution panel MDP-1. zoom to space Electrical 214. Notice that panel LP-2C is not connected. expand the warning category for Circuit is not assigned to a panel ➤ Warning 2. 21 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. 23 Close the file with or without saving it. 22 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. 15 In the dialog. select MDP-1.

217 .Creating a Plumbing System In this tutorial. you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan and design a plumbing system.

218 .

Specifying default sanitary piping settings for the main and branch piping. Adding a pipe size. and click OK. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing\RME_Plumb_Planning_01_i. Create a pipe type 1 In the Project Browser. expand Families ➤ Pipes ➤ Pipe Types. In this lesson. Loading pipe fittings required by the plumbing system. click Duplicate.Planning a Plumbing System 9 Creating plumbing systems in Revit MEP is similar to any design project. you prepare to design the plumbing system by: ■ ■ ■ ■ Creating a PVC Sanitary Pipe type. and specify the default fittings that will be used with this type.Vent. 3 In the Type Properties dialog. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click Properties. Configuring a Plumbing and Piping System Revit MEP provides families of common plumbing components that you place in your plumbing plan. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. right-click PVC .Design is open. 2 In the Project Browser.Sanitary. planning is critical to a successful design. In this exercise. You load the families of components that are required for your plumbing systems. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . in addition to loading existing families.rvt.Plumbing Plan . type PVC .Design ➤ Floor Plans. click Training Files. 4 In the Name dialog. you create a PVC pipe type. 219 . and verify that Level 1 .

22 Click New Size. 14 Expand Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. Cross. select Pipe Types: PVC Sanitary. under Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. enter 5/8''. select Plastic. for Pipe Connector Tolerance. NOTE For additional information on the Mechanical Settings. Specify sanitary piping settings 11 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ . For Offset.rfa. 26 Click OK. In the Project Browser. for Nominal.Sch 40 . 9 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. 10 On the Selection panel. The new pipe type is listed in the Project Browser under Families ➤ Pipe Fittings.Sch 40 . 21 In the right pane. enter 27/32''.Sch 40 . Tap.PVC . enter 1/2''.PVC . select Tee.DWV: Standard. 15 For System Type. 27 For the new pipe size. 8 Click Place Pipe Fitting tab ➤ Model panel ➤ Load Family. select Tee Vent . 17 In the left pane. refer to Revit MEP Online Help. select Sanitary. select Pipe Settings ➤ Sizes. 16 Specify settings for the Main sanitary piping: ■ ■ For Pipe Type. click Training Files. Add a pipe size 20 In the left pane. click Modify. enter -4' . PVC . Tee. 24 For Inside Diameter. under Pipe Types. and click OK.0''.5 In the Type Properties dialog. 28 Close the file with or without saving it. 6 Click OK. select Branch. and click Main. 23 In the Add Pipe Size dialog. 18 For System Type. 13 In the right panel. 19 Specify the same settings for the Branch sanitary piping as you used for the Main.DWV: Standard. verify that Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing are selected. 12 In the left pane of the Mechanical Settings dialog.PVC . and open Imperial\Families\Trap P . under Mechanical.DWV. for: ■ ■ ■ ■ Preferred Junction Type. select Sanitary.Vent is listed. select None. click Pipe Settings. Load piping component families 7 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. select Tee Reducing Double Vent . for Material. 220 | Chapter 9 Planning a Plumbing System . enter 10°. 25 For Outside. DWV represents Domestic Waste Vent.

221 . you design the plumbing system for the Level 1 men’s room in a commercial building. and hot and cold water piping. Create the cold water system. including plumbing fixtures. Create the hot water system. sanitary piping.Designing a Plumbing System 10 In this lesson. and create piping to physically connect the sinks to the hot water system. Create the sanitary plumbing system. add a hot water heater. You learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Place sanitary plumbing fixtures. vent. Add a sanitary and vent stack to the system. Create piping to connect sinks to the sanitary system. and add piping to physically connect the fixtures to the system.

1 urinal. 222 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . you add 2 toilets. Place wall-mounted toilets 1 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and a floor drain to the level 1 men’s room. including the men’s room (space Male 107). 2 Zoom in to the bottom middle area of the floor plan. and verify that Level 1 . move the cursor over a space and refer to the tooltip or the Status Bar for information.Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures In this exercise.Design ➤ Floor Plans. click Training Files.Design is open. as shown. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing .rvt.Plumbing Plan . You place 3 sinks in a later exercise. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_01_i. NOTE To identify a space name and number.

against the left wall.Wall Mounted. 6 Click to place a toilet in the accessible toilet space. and 3 sinks. select Public . in the Type Selector.1.6 gpf. 5 On the Placement panel.Flush Valve . 1 wall-mounted urinal. 4 On the Element panel. Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures | 223 . under Water Closet . 3 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Plumbing Fixture. Reference lines are included in the plan view to make it easier to place components. verify that Place on Vertical Face is selected. centered on the bottom horizontal reference line.The men's room is partitioned for 2 toilet stalls. as shown.

Wall Hung. zoom in closer. 10 Click to place the urinal in the space above the 2 toilet spaces. 224 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . and press Esc. (Again.7 Click to place another toilet. NOTE If it is difficult to align the urinal to the reference line. above the first in the standard toilet space. under Urinal . select 3/4'' Flush Valve. use the reference line to center the fixture.) 8 Press Esc. Place a wall-mounted urinal 9 In the Type Selector.

Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures | 225 . click Place on Face.2'' Drain. 12 On the Placement panel. 14 Click Modify.Place a floor drain 11 In the Type Selector. In placing the fixture. under Floor Drain . select 5''x5'' Strainer . 13 Click to place the drain above and to the right of the accessible toilet (at approximately 6'' and 6'' from the intersection of the reference lines for the 2 toilet areas). you select the floor as the face because this is a floor mounted drain.Rectangular.

The default systems contain the fixtures that you placed. 20 Expand the Default Domestic Cold Water folder. 19 Expand Default Sanitary. and notice that there are 2 default systems: Default Sanitary. you create a sanitary system consisting of the toilets.Open the System Browser 15 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. 18 Expand the Unassigned folder. 16 Click the title bar for the browser. 17 If all disciplines are displayed. 226 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . and a floor drain. and notice that the drain is not included because it does not have a cold water connector. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_02_i. right-click in the System Browser table heading. You then use Revit MEP’s Layout Path tools to create sloped piping to connect the fixtures to a sanitary outlet. 21 Close the file with or without saving it. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. Creating a Sanitary System This is the first of 3 exercises that guide you through creating the piping for the men’s room sanitary plumbing system. and Default Domestic Cold Water. a urinal. In this exercise. and dock it by dragging it to the bottom of the drawing area. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. The fixtures are included in the default system based on the connectors included with the components (sanitary connectors and cold water connectors). and review the components listed under this system. and click View ➤ Piping.

clear Lines (<Overhead>). 2 In the Project Browser. and click OK. and verify that Level 1 .Plumbing Plan . open Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . Only plumbing fixtures are selected.Design ➤ Floor Plans. verify that Plumbing Fixtures is selected. 8 In the Filter dialog.Create the sanitary plumbing system 1 In the Project Browser. starting in the lower left and moving to the upper right corner. 3 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 4 Zoom in to the plumbing fixtures in both views. 7 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. Creating a Sanitary System | 227 . 6 In the plan view. draw a selection box around the fixtures in the men's room.Design is open.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Plumbing. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . 5 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. and position the browser window at the bottom of the screen.

If you deselected the drain. You include the bathroom space number in the name. for System Name. the Create Cold Water System option would also be available. All of the fixtures except for the drain also have cold water connectors. and notice that Sanitary 107 is listed. 11 On the Options Bar. click Finish Editing System. 13 In the Systems Browser. The fixtures you selected all have sanitary connectors. The components that were listed under the default system are now included in the Sanitary 107 system. 12 On the Edit System panel. 228 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System .9 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Sanitary. enter Sanitary 107. and the empty default sanitary folder is deleted. 10 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. so the Create Sanitary System is available. expand Sanitary.

as shown. at the midpoint of the detail lines. 15 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. select one of the components in the system. The base is placed. and click OK. Creating a Sanitary System | 229 . A preview of the piping layout displays. select Sanitary 107. for example. 17 Click Generate Layout tab ➤ Generate Layout panel ➤ Place Base. a toilet.Create physical connections 14 In the plan view. The base creates a vertical pipe for the system to connect into and establishes a source or an outlet for flow. 16 In the Select a System dialog. 18 Click to select a point to the left of the accessible toilet.

26 On the Options Bar. The positive value slopes the pipe down toward the base point.19 On the Options Bar. and click OK. for Solution Type. it is helpful to be able to change the defaults as you work. for Diameter. 20 On the Generate Layout panel. enter -1' 0''. 22 In the left pane of the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. When laying out a number of different systems with different offset requirements. 21 On Options Bar. The default settings are automatically modified. for Offset. 230 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . The elevation is specified low enough to allow sloping of the sanitary piping in the system. and modify it to meet project requirements. select Intersections. You accept this suggested solution. and click Settings. click (Next Solution) until Solution Type 2 of 7 is selected. The elevation of the base with relation to the other components in the system is critical. select Main. 25 On the Options Bar. You override the default pipe settings before applying the recommended pipe layout. 23 For Offset. and for Offset. enter -1' 0''. select 4''. enter 1/8'' / 12''. 27 Click Modify. for Slope. enter -4'-0”. 24 In the left pane. select Branch. click Solutions.

29 Click the move parallel control (4-way arrow). Creating a Sanitary System | 231 . select the vertical route path segments. and move the cursor to the left to align all 4 segments to the base point.Customize the suggested layout 28 While pressing Ctrl.

as shown. and drag the line to the left to snap perpendicular to the main.30 In the 3D view. as shown. use the ViewCube to orient the view. 31 Click Modify. 232 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 32 Select the vertical branch line for one of the toilets.

34 On the Generate Layout panel. adjust the vertical branch line for the other toilet. Creating a Sanitary System | 233 . click Finish Layout.33 Using the previous method.

and examine the sanitary tee to verify proper orientation.Examine the piping Complete all steps in this section in the 3D Plumbing view. select the fitting and click to reorient it. 234 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . ■ ■ ■ ■ 1=Branch in a network 2=Branch in a network including the branch objects 3=Branch in a network up to a piece of equipment 4=Network (including fixtures) 36 Click to select the fitting to the drain. and press Tab 4 times to check connectivity. 35 Highlight one of the plumbing fixtures. When a fitting is reversed.

you continue with the work from the last exercise. adding sinks in the men’s room. and check the slope control.37 Select the pipe segment to the right of the fitting. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 235 . as shown. 38 Close the file with or without saving it. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System In this exercise. and manually creating the piping that connects them to the sanitary system. The slope control for every segment should indicate the slope is toward the sanitary outlet.

rvt. Add sinks to the layout 1 In the Project Browser. 4 On the Element panel. in the Type Selector. and verify that Level 1 . 2 Zoom in to the men’s room (Space Male 107). In the left pane of the Open dialog.Public. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_03_i.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. 6 Click to place the sink centered on the top horizontal reference line. 236 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System .Design ➤ Floor Plans. 5 On the Placement panel. verify that Place on Vertical Face is selected. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . 3 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Plumbing Fixture. click Training Files. under Lavatory .Plumbing Plan .Rectangular. as shown. select 22''x22'' .Design is open.

in this step you can enter 2 4 (two space four) to specify 2' 4''. you can enter a space to separate the value for feet and inches. 8 Select the sink. and press Enter to create a second sink. select Multiple. TIP When entering dimensions. 9 Make 2 copies of the sink: ■ ■ ■ Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. For example. On the Options Bar. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 237 . without having to enter ' and '' symbols. Click the right endpoint of the placement reference line for the sink to establish a start point.7 Click Modify. ■ Move the cursor up above the top reference line. enter 2' 4''.

12 In the drawing area. click Add To System. and press Enter to create the third sink. 238 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . Add sinks to the sanitary system 10 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. click Finish Editing System. 15 Click the 3 sinks. 13 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. expand Sanitary ➤ Sanitary 107. and position the browser window at the bottom of the screen.■ ■ Enter 2' 4''. 11 In the System Browser. select a component of the Sanitary 107 system. 14 On the Edit Piping System panel. 16 On the Edit System panel. Press Esc.

right-click the top connector (sanitary connector). 21 Select the tee. Create piping to connect the sinks 17 In the Project Browser. double-click 3D Plumbing.Design ➤ 3D Views. 19 In the 3D view. 22 In the plan view. with the tee fitting selected. 18 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile.In the System Browser. 20 Select the fitting. and click the + control on the left to upgrade the fitting to a tee. notice that the 3 sinks (lavatories) have been added to the Sanitary 107 system. use the ViewCube to orient the view. and zoom in to the elbow fitting for the urinal. and click Draw Pipe. as shown. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 239 . under Design ➤ Plumbing .

for Slope. and click Apply. press Spacebar.6''. for Offset. the pipe being drawn automatically assumes the size and elevation of the fitting. enter 1/8'' / 12''. NOTE Piping is displayed according to color filters specified in the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. 25 Move the cursor up to the centerline of the middle sink. When you press the Spacebar. 26 On the Options Bar. 27 Click Modify. piping connected to the sanitary system displays in olive green.23 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Placement Tools panel ➤ Automatically Connect to switch off this option. In this example. 240 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . enter 2' . 24 On the Options Bar. and click to draw the pipe.

click to place the fitting. move the cursor over the stub pipe. 31 Click Modify.Sch 40 . 30 In the 3D view.DWV. and click the lower rotate control to align the fitting parallel to the sinks.PVC . 29 In the Type Selector. select Standard. under Wye 45 Deg Double . 32 Select the double wye fitting. and when the vertical center line displays. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 241 .3D view shown for clarity 28 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting.

33 With the fitting selected. In the next steps. 39 Draw the pipe as shown: ■ Draw at a 45 degree angle up and to the right. 37 Select the fitting. 36 In the section view. Add pipe stubs to the double wye 35 In the plan view. 34 Press Esc. 242 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . double-click the section head to open the section view. and press Enter. you add pipe segments to the double wye. enter 6''. enter 1'. zoom in to the double wye fitting. 38 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Placement Tools panel ➤ Automatically Connect to switch on this option. and click Draw Pipe. for Offset. on the Options Bar. and press Enter. right-click the right connector.

Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 243 . 42 Click Modify. draw similar piping for the left sink (the first segment angled at 135°). 43 Select the center vertical pipe in the double wye fitting. 41 Using the same method. as shown. ■ Move the cursor horizontally to the right until the end of the pipe segment intersects with the centerline of the right sink.Entering a length dimension while drawing pipes activates Revit MEP’s listening dimension tool. and click to place the pipe. which automatically sets the length of the pipe to the value entered. 40 Click Modify.

49 Using the same method. 244 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 48 Click Modify. and press Enter to create the segment of pipe. 46 In the section view. Add P-Trap Fittings 45 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile so you can see all 3 views. press Spacebar. right-click the bottom connector. draw a 6'' pipe for the other 2 sinks. 47 Move the cursor down. draw a selection box around the left sink to select it. enter 6''. and press Esc.44 Drag the upper control until the pipe aligns with the centerline of the horizontal piping. and click Draw Pipe.

53 Using the same method.DWV. and click the rotate control 3 times to orient the pipe toward the double wye piping. rotate the P-Trap for the other 2 sinks. 54 Click Modify. 52 In the plan view. 51 In the Type Selector.PVC . 56 Using the same method.50 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. place a P-Trap on the other 2 sinks.Sch 40 . 55 In the 3D view. You can see in the 3D view that it is connected. select the P-Trap on the left. click to place the P-Trap at the endpoint of the stub pipe for the top sink. You adjust the orientation after placing all 3 P-Traps. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 245 . select Standard. under Trap P .

The piping is connected and the appropriate fittings are automatically created. Select the double wye pipe on the left. 246 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 58 Using the same method. and press Enter.57 Finish the connection for the left sink: ■ ■ ■ In the 3D view. right-click the left connector on the P-Trap. select the left P-Trap. Click in the plan view. 59 Connect the middle sink using a routing solution: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the 3D view. Move the cursor to the left. connect the right sink to the double wye.. enter 6''. In the plan view. and click Draw Pipe. Click Modify. click to select the P-Trap for the middle sink. Click Modify Pipe Fittings tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into.

Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 247 . select PVC Sanitary. while pressing Ctrl. as shown. and select the vertical section of pipe from the wye. In the Type Selector. On the Routing Solutions panel. select the section of pipe you just drew. while pressing Ctrl. under Pipe Types. and select a proposed solution. ■ ■ ■ ■ Specify a slope 60 In the 3D view. Routing Solutions tools are activated that let you add control points or remove control points. select the 3 horizontal pipes from the sinks. Press Esc. click Finish to select the recommended solution.■ In the 3D view. Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Routing Solutions.

rvt. click Finish. 65 Close the file with or without saving it. verify that 1/8'' / 12'' is selected. Refining the Sanitary Stack In this exercise. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. 64 Select a pipe that you just modified. 62 On the Options Bar. for Slope. and verify the slope. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. You have appropriately sloped the pipe. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_04_i. 248 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 63 On the Slope Editor panel. you continue with the work on the sanitary system. adjusting the sanitary stack.61 Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Slope.

Floor level line. under Wye Combination with 8th Bend .Sch 40 . Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 38. click Modify. as shown. Add a reducing wye to the stack 8 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting.Add a vertical soil stack 1 In the Project Browser. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . 2 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 9 In the Type Selector. select the vertical stack. 10 In the 3D view. 7 On the Selection panel. and click Draw Pipe. 3D Views ➤ 3D Plumbing. Refining the Sanitary Stack | 249 . and click the intersection to place the fitting. 6 Move the cursor up to the 02 .PVC . and click to draw the pipe. right-click the top connector. select Standard. and adjust the views as necessary to view the plumbing.Design. and open the following views: ■ ■ ■ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 .Plumbing Plan . select the elbow fitting on the right. 4 Click the top + control to upgrade the fitting to a tee.DWV. 5 Select the tee.Design. 3 In the Section view.Overall.

17 In the Type Selector. for Offset. under Plug . 15 Press Esc. select Standard.11 Click Modify. 18 In the plan view. and click the rotate control to change the orientation. enter 1'-0”. as shown.PVC . 13 Click the rotate control once.DWV. Add a pipe plug to cap the cleanout 16 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. 12 Select the fitting. 250 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 14 On the Options Bar. click the midpoint at the end of the sanitary pipe.Sch 40 .

rvt. Creating the Cold Water System In this exercise.Design is open. Specify mechanical settings for the hot and cold water systems 1 In the Project Browser. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files.Plumbing Plan . 20 Close the file with or without saving it. Creating the Cold Water System | 251 . you create the domestic cold water system and add piping to connect all of the fixtures in the men’s room to the system.Design ➤ Floor Plans. The plug is added to the end to cap off the cleanout.19 Click Modify. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_05_i. A cleanout is required on all vertical stacks. and verify that Level 1 .

under Design ➤ Plumbing . select Domestic Hot Water. (Do not select the floor drain because it does not have a hot or cold water connector. click Check None. select Pipe Types: Water. select Main. and specify the same settings for the Branch Domestic Hot Water system. for System Type.) 10 Click OK. if necessary. For Offset. urinal. and sinks. and for System Type. select Branch. 5 Specify options for the Main hot water piping: ■ ■ For Pipe Type. 252 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System .Overall.) 16 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 17 In the Filter dialog. select Domestic Cold Water. Create the cold water system 11 In the Project Browser. verify that the value is 9' 0''. select Domestic Hot Water.Design ➤ 3D Views. (Remember to specify Domestic Cold Water as the System Type. double-click 3D Plumbing . expand Unassigned. To minimize opportunities for piping interference. 6 In the left pane. 14 In the System Browser. and notice that Default Domestic Hot Water and Default Domestic Cold Water systems are listed. minimize the Sanitary system. For Offset. 13 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. enter 9' 3''. 3 In the left pane of the Mechanical settings dialog. draw a selection box to select the toilets. and click OK. 9 In the left pane. 12 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. and position the browser at the bottom of the screen. you specify different offset elevations for the cold water piping and the hot water piping. 4 In the right pane. 15 In the plan view. select Branch. and specify the same settings for the Branch Domestic Cold Water system. and click Main. 7 In the left pane. select Plumbing Fixtures.2 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ . 8 Specify options for the Main cold water piping: ■ ■ For Pipe Type. These categories include all of the components placed earlier that have relevant connectors. expand Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. select Pipe Types: Water. for System Type.

24 Click the horizontal water main above the toilets. select the toilet closest to the vertical soil stack. indicating that it is now part of the cold water system. 20 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For System Name. 19 On the System Tools panel. In the System Browser. Creating the Cold Water System | 253 .18 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Domestic Cold Water. 21 On the Edit System panel. Create piping for the cold water system 22 In the 3D view. enter DCW 107. click Edit System. Notice that the water main displays in blue. Expand Domestic Cold Water ➤ DCW 107 to verify the components. 23 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. notice that the Default Domestic Cold water system is removed because all of the fixtures have been added to the DCW 107 system. For Flow Conversion Method. verify that Predominantly Flush Valves is selected. click Finish Editing System.

2 7/8''. enter 3' . connect the second toilet. 32 Move the cursor to the right. press Spacebar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the existing pipe. enter 0”/12”. 35 In the Type Selector. 31 On the Options Bar. and press Enter. and press Enter. and click Draw Pipe. for Offset. 37 On the Options Bar. 254 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 36 Move the cursor to the left. 27 On the Placement Tools panel. select 3/4''. under Pipe Types. click to the left of the urinal. right-click the top DCW connector. select Water. select the sink above the urinal. 34 In the plan view. and click the connector. 30 In the plan view. and click to place the pipe. 38 Move the cursor up to the top of the third sink. at the intersection of the water main pipe. enter 4'0”. 26 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe. as shown. 28 In the Type Selector. For Offset. enter 10'. For Slope. verify that Pipe Types: Water is selected.25 Using the same method. 29 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ For Diameter. enter 7''. as shown. for Offset. 33 Click Modify. verify that Automatically Connect is selected.

41 Select the top sink. 43 Click the branch cold water pipe.39 Move the cursor to the left. and click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. 40 Click Modify. and click OK. (Status Bar indicates Horizontal and [Pipes : Pipe Types : Water]). select Connector 1 : Domestic Cold Water : Round : 1'' : In. and click to connect to the main cold water line. Creating the Cold Water System | 255 . 42 In the Select Connector dialog. The sink is connected to the cold water branch piping.

44 Using the same method. Creating the Hot Water System In this exercise. 256 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . connect the middle sink to the branch pipe. add a water heater. 45 Close the file with or without saving it. and add piping to connect the sinks in the menu’s room to the system. you create the hot water system.

Create the hot water system 1 In the Project Browser.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. Creating the Hot Water System | 257 . open Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . In the left pane of the Open dialog. 5 In the System Browser.rvt.Design is open. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_06_i. and position the browser at the bottom of the screen.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Plumbing .Overall. 3 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. while pressing Ctrl. click Training Files. expand the Unassigned folder. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . select the 3 sinks.Design ➤ Floor Plans. and expand the Default Domestic Hot Water system. Notice that the 3 sinks (lavatories) are listed. 4 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. 2 In the Project Browser. 6 In the plan view.Plumbing Plan . and verify that Level 1 .

under Water Heater . 17 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel.6 Gallon. enter Domestic Hot Water 107. 10 In the System Browser. 9 In the Instance Properties dialog. the Domestic Hot Water 107 system is listed along with the 3 sinks (lavatories). 258 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . for System Name. a best practice to maximize operation is to assign all components to the appropriate system and clear the default folders. you edit the system to add equipment. 12 In the Type Selector. 15 In the System Browser. click to position the water heater in the lower left corner of the utility room above the bathroom. You add the water heater to the Domestic Cold Water system first. and click OK. Default Other folders are created and the Water Heater is listed. Default Domestic Hot Water.) Add the water heater to DCW 107 16 Select a sink in the men’s room. 14 Click Modify. Add a water heater 11 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. and click Edit System. verify that DCW 107 is selected. 8 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ System Properties. Default Domestic Cold Water.7 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Domestic Hot Water.Tankless. (The folders are created according to the connectors available on the hot water heater. as shown. When designing systems. in the Unassigned folder. 13 In the plan view. In later steps. select 0.

Creating the Hot Water System | 259 . 24 Move the cursor up. Slope: 0''/12''. specify: ■ ■ ■ Diameter: 1''. and click the water main line. 25 On the Options Bar. right-click the middle left connector. click Finish Editing System. 23 On the Options Bar. and press Enter. for Offset. Offset: 4' 6''. and select Draw Pipe. 21 On the Placement Tools panel. as shown. verify that Automatically Connect is selected. enter 10’. Connect the water heater to the cold water supply 20 In the plan view. select the water heater.18 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. 22 In the Type Selector. The tankless water heater is connected to the cold water supply. and on the Edit System panel. 27 Click Modify. enter 1' 6''. verify that Pipe Types: Water is selected. 19 Select the water heater. 26 Move the cursor to the right.

and on the Placement Tools panel. enter 1' 6''. for Offset. click Automatically Connect to switch it off. for Diameter. select a sink. 260 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 38 Move the cursor to the right. and in the System Selector. and click just to the left of the cold water pipe. right-click the bottom connector (domestic hot water). and press Enter. as shown. click Finish Editing System. 35 On the Options Bar.Add the water heater to Domestic Hot Water 107 28 In the plan view. enter 1''. and for Offset. and click Draw Pipe. Connect the water heater to the hot water supply 34 Select the water heater. 33 On the Edit System panel. 37 On the Options Bar. 36 Move the cursor down. select 4'-6''. 30 On the System Tools panel. 32 Click the tankless hot water heater. enter 9' 0''. click Edit System. select Domestic Hot Water 107. 31 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Select Equipment. 29 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel.

for Offset. 41 Move the cursor down.39 Move the cursor down. enter 2' 8''. 42 Click Modify. Creating the Hot Water System | 261 . enter 1’. and press Enter. 40 On the Options Bar. as shown. and click just above the bottom sink.

43 In the 3D view. 262 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 44 Select the horizontal pipe that you just drew. connect the other 2 sinks to the hot water pipe. The hot water pipe is automatically connected to the sink. and click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. select the left sink (the one closest to the urinal). 45 Using the same method and the Connect Into tool.

rvt project and view the vent piping for the plumbing system. Creating the Hot Water System | 263 .46 Close the file with or without saving it. 47 Optional: Open the RME_Plumb_Design_07_i.

264 .

Creating a Fire Protection System In this tutorial. you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan and design a fire protection system. 265 .

266 .

This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. After finishing each exercise. The training files that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training Files ➤ Imperial directory. 267 . However. go to http://www. You create a new pipe type. and then you configure conversion settings that you will use when you create piping to physically connect the sprinklers.com/revitmep-documentation and download them. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Planning_01_i. you will use a project file that has already been linked to an architectural model. You will also check a Space Schedule that you can use to assess the coverage for the fire protection systems. In this lesson.Planning a Fire Protection System 11 The most common method of designing systems in Revit MEP is to work within a linked architectural building model. you begin work on the project that contains a wet fire protection system. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially. see Planning Mechanical Systems in the Mechanical Systems tutorial.autodesk. If the tutorial training files are not present. Create a pipe type 1 In the Project Browser. In this tutorial. 2 Right-click Standard. you will create a wet fire protection system for the second floor of an office building.rvt. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided training file. A copy is made of the Standard pipe type. expand Families ➤ Pipes ➤ Pipe Types. you can choose to save your work. with Space components placed in the areas throughout the model. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. and click Duplicate. Specifying Pipe Settings In this exercise. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. click Training Files. To learn more about linking and preparing an architectural model. You can search this directory to verify that the training files have been downloaded. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

select Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion ➤ Branch. structural beams. In the next exercise. Configuring the Conversion settings is usually a one-time process unless you need to change them during your project. The conversion settings for the Fire Protection Wet system type display. In the left pane. and click Properties. For Offset. For System Type. You can configure the Conversion settings at the beginning or during your project. For Pipe Type. select Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet. click Rename. 6 In the Project Browser. Next. NOTE Conversion settings are applied when you convert the pipe layout path to physical piping. verify that Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet is listed. for Material. This offset elevation places the pipe main at 9 feet above the referenced level for the views. Determining Zone Requirements In this exercise. you create project parameters and work with schedules. This offset elevation places the pipe branches at 9 feet above the referenced level for the views. under Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. select Main. or architectural components. This is useful for avoiding interference with pipes. select Carbon Steel. You now specify the conversion settings for the pipe branches. select Fire Protection Wet. 9 Click OK. In this exercise. under Mechanical. You then assign spaces in the top portion of the plan to one zone and spaces in the bottom portion to another zone. Configure pipe conversion settings 7 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Mechanical Settings. Level 2 is the referenced level for the views where you will be designing. select Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet. you create a sprinkler zone project parameter. and enter Fire Protection Wet. verify that 9' 0" is specified. select Fire Protection Wet. 5 In the Type Properties dialog. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ NOTE The branch offset allows you to automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles.3 Right-click the copy (Standard 2). so the pipe main will be offset from level 2. duct. you modify the type properties of the pipe. However. 4 Right-click Fire Protection Wet. you should configure or verify the Conversion settings before you convert a layout path. verify that 9' 0" is selected. 8 In the Mechanical Settings dialog: ■ ■ In the left pane. 268 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . 10 Close the file with or without saving it. You also configured the conversion settings for both wet and dry fire protection systems. you created a new pipe type for the wet fire protection system and modified its type properties. For Offset. For Pipe Type. and then click OK. For System Type. The new pipe type is created based on the Standard pipe type.

8 Using a crossing window. click Add. enter Sprinkler Zone. Create project parameters 1 In the Project Browser.Design is highlighted. indicating that it’s the active view. 4 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Data. You draw a crossing window from the lower left to the upper right of the area you want to enclose. 7 In the Instance Properties dialog. and click Element Properties. For Group parameter under. for Sprinkler Zone. click Training Files. Under Categories. 5 Click OK twice. for Name. Determining Zone Requirements | 269 . right-click. 3 In the Project Parameters dialog. 6 In the drawing area. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Planning_02_i. enter Zone 1. select Spaces. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . select Fire Protection. select the upper half of the building. and then click OK.Fire Protection Plan .Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . 2 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Parameters.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.rvt. select space Instruction 221 as shown. When you highlight a space using the cursor. In the left pane of the Open dialog. the space crossing lines display. under Fire Protection.

13 Using the same method. click Training Files. including a calculated value parameter.9 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. to which you add various parameters. enter Zone 2. 270 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Planning_03_i. You modify the schedules and add an embedded schedule in order to use the schedule as a design tool. under Fire Protection. and then access instance properties. and then click OK. select Zone 1. filter the bottom half of the building to select only Spaces. for Sprinkler Zone. and click OK. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule In this exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and then click OK. 12 In the Instance Properties dialog. 11 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. verify that only Spaces are selected. under Fire Protection. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 14 In the Instance Properties dialog. you create schedules for sprinkler design.rvt. 16 Close the file with or without saving it. 15 Press Esc to clear the selection. 10 In the Filter dialog. for Sprinkler Zone.

For Name. 13 To resize the column widths in the schedule. click Add Parameter. For Key name. double-click on each column separator. select Fire Protection. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 271 . do the following: ■ ■ ■ Clear Use project settings.Create a key schedule 1 In the Project Browser. click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ Rows: New.Design is highlighted. select Maximum Spacing. In the Maximum Spacing column. Select Schedule keys. enter Sprinkler Spacing and Coverage Area Schedule.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . 5 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter data. create a parameter named Maximum Coverage Area that is an Area type and is grouped under Fire Protection.Fire Protection Plan . indicating that it’s the active view. enter 15. 11 Click OK twice. 8 In the Schedule Properties dialog. select Feet and fractional inches. and on the ribbon. For Group parameter under. select Spaces. select To the nearest 1'. 10 In the Format dialog. 6 Using the same method. 7 Click OK. 3 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ Under Category. click the Formatting tab. 14 Select the new header. ■ ■ ■ ■ Create a schedule parameter 4 In the Schedule Properties dialog. 15 In the new row: ■ ■ In the Protection Area Type column. For Units. and click Field Format. For Rounding. enter Light. For Type of Parameter. select Length. 9 On the Formatting tab. Notice that the schedule name and the phase are automatically added. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Schedule/Quantities. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . Click OK. Click OK. enter Maximum Spacing. Obstructed-Combustible. enter Protection Area Construction Type. Add schedule data 12 Select the header in the Key Name column and enter Protection Area Type as the new header. The schedule displays. for Name.

Unobstructed Maximum Spacing 15' Maximum Coverage Area 200 SF 15' 12' 12' 12' 15' 15' 200 SF 90 SF 90 SF 90 SF 130 SF 130 SF 15' 130 SF Create a sprinkler schedule 17 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Schedule/Quantities. enter Sprinkler Schedule.■ In the Maximum Coverage Area column. and press Enter. NOTE The units of measure display automatically. Click OK. Obstructed-Noncombustible Ordinary. Specify fields and create a calculated value parameter ■ In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ On the Fields tab. under Available fields. Obstructed-Combustible Ordinary. For Name. enter 130. 16 Using the same method. Obstructed-Combustible Extra. Obstructed-Noncombustible Light. double-click in the order listed: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Number Name Sprinkler Zone Level Area Protection Area Construction Type 272 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . based on the parameter settings you specified previously. add more schedule data: Protection Area Type Light. select Spaces. Unobstructed Ordinary. Unobstructed Extra. 18 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Category. Obstructed-Noncombustible Extra.

Click OK. The Sprinkler Schedule displays. The resulting formula is Area/Maximum Coverage Area. For Discipline. click Edit. Select Header and Blank line. for Sorting/Grouping. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. 20 On the Formatting tab. 22 Click OK twice. select 0 decimal place. 21 In the Format dialog: ■ ■ ■ Clear Use default settings. For Then by. Enter the formula operator / after Area. and click View Properties. enter Minimum Sprinklers. for Sort by. In the Calculated Value dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. and then use the method learned previously to select Maximum Coverage Area from the Fields dialog. select Common. For Type.■ ■ ■ ■ Maximum Coverage Area Maximum Spacing Click Calculated Value. click . under Other. select Minimum Sprinklers. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 273 . The Minimum Sprinklers calculated value is added to the scheduled fields (at the bottom of the list). select Area. For Units. 25 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ On the Sorting/Grouping tab. and click OK. For Rounding. and click Field Format. select Fixed. For Formula. 19 Click the Formatting tab. select Sprinkler Zone. In the Fields dialog. Organize schedule data 23 Right-click in the schedule. This calculated value parameter allows you to immediately determine what spaces meet the sprinkler design requirements. select Level. select Number.

27 In the drawing area. and then click Field Format. and then select Hidden field. and click View Properties. and select Totals only. The schedule is arranged and sorted as specified. 26 Click OK 3 times. select Level equals Level 2. select Sprinkler Zone. On the Formatting tab: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Fields. At the bottom of the dialog. 30 Click OK twice. select Minimum Sprinklers.■ ■ ■ ■ Select Header and Blank line. ■ In the Format dialog. select Level. select Hidden field. select Grand totals. Under Field formatting. 274 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . for Filter by. click Edit. select Number. 28 In the Instance Properties dialog. For Then by (second instance). For Fields. right-click the schedule. 29 In the Schedule Properties dialog. verify that Use default settings is selected. for Filter. For Fields.

Group schedule columns 31 In the drawing area. double-click Type. and then click Embedded Schedule Properties. select Count. and Count. and select Totals only. 32 Click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ Headers: Group. select Sprinklers. Under Field formatting. ■ ■ ■ 38 Click OK 3 times. for Available fields. use click and drag to select the last 4 schedule column headers. delete the word Maximum.The schedule is filtered to show only zones on level 2. On the Sorting/Grouping tab. On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. for Fields. select Embedded Schedule. 34 In the Maximum Coverage Area column and in the Maximum Spacing column. and click View Properties. Create an embedded schedule 35 Right-click the schedule. 33 Click in the grouped header cell. select Grand totals. for Embedded Schedule. System Name. click Edit. For Category. under Other. and enter Maximum Sprinkler Spacing and Area Coverage. 36 In the Instance Properties dialog. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 275 . select Calculate totals. 37 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ On the Embedded Schedule tab. On the Formatting tab.

When you change editable entries in the schedule to modify your system. 43 Click Cancel. select Ordinary. and click OK.Modify space properties from the schedule 39 In the Project Browser. 48 In the floor plan. notice that there is nothing specified for Protection Area Construction Type. under Identity Data. and access the instance properties. select Light. under Identity Data.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . Unobstructed. 276 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . click in the floor plan to make it the active view. 44 In the schedule. IMPORTANT A schedule in Revit MEP is not only a construction document but also a design tool. Notice also that the Maximum Spacing and Maximum Coverage Area parameters that you created are listed under Fire Protection. select space 221 Instruction. 46 With the space still selected. double-click FP . but their values are not determined. This digital database information source is the central concept of Building Information Modeling (BIM). Unobstructed. 52 Click OK. Unobstructed. 45 For Protection Area Construction Type.Fire Protection Plan Design. 40 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile to tile the floor plan and the Sprinkler Schedule. 42 In the Instance Properties dialog. As a result. 47 In the Instance Properties dialog. for Protection Area Construction Type. under Identity Data. 50 Access the instance properties. use a selection box to select the upper half of the building. and the spacing parameter values are evident. 51 In the Instance Properties dialog. The parameter change is evident in the schedule. Notice that the selection you made in the schedule displays in the dialog. select space 221 Instruction. for Protection Area Construction Type. you are actually editing information in a database of building information. 49 Filter the selection for spaces only. select Ordinary. 41 In the plan view. each change is dynamic and immediately propagates throughout your project. and click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.

53 Close the file with or without saving it. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 277 .

278 .

The goal of this tutorial is to teach you to create a fire protection system using Autodesk Revit MEP 2010.Designing a Fire Protection System 12 In this tutorial. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided training file. The training files that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training Files ➤ Imperial directory. If the tutorial training files are not present. you follow a series of exercises that teach the recommended systems design workflow for Autodesk Revit MEP 2010.autodesk. click Training Files. By following the recommended workflow. Place host-based sprinklers 1 In the Project Browser. methodology. you can choose to save your work.FP_Ceiling to make it the active view.com/revitmep-documentation and download them. go to http://www.Design ➤ Ceiling Plans.rvt. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially. After finishing each exercise. and specific techniques for designing fire protection systems in Revit MEP. you place host-based sprinklers in a ceiling plan view. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . As you create the system. you will understand the process. In the left pane of the Open dialog. As you place the sprinklers. You can search this directory to verify that the training files have been downloaded. 279 . However. and double-click Level 2 . You will use the sprinkler schedule that you created in a previous exercise as a design guide for sprinkler placement. hosted to the linked architectural ceiling family. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. At the end of this tutorial. you learn the best practices for designing systems with Revit MEP. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_01_i. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. you will learn various methods to quickly and precisely place sprinklers into the ceiling plan. Adding Sprinklers In this exercise. you create a wet fire protection system using a linked architectural model of a building project.

6 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Sprinkler. After placing the initial sprinkler. 280 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . the layout path feature will attempt to create separate piping paths to the sprinklers. and arrange the views so that they are tiled horizontally.2 Zoom in to the spaces in the lower right corner of the building. When there is a small misalignment. open Schedules/Quantities ➤ Sprinkler Schedule. there is insufficient space between the 2 branches to place fittings and the conversion will fail. you copy and array sprinklers referencing the intersection of ceiling grids. Sprinklers should either be aligned to each other or sufficiently separated to allow space for fittings. 4 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. When this happens. IMPORTANT The alignment of sprinklers is critical and will affect the conversion of a layout path to physical piping in later exercises. This action aligns sprinklers so that the piping layout is more efficient. 5 Click in the ceiling plan to make it the active view. 3 In the Project Browser.

Adding Sprinklers | 281 . 11 In the drawing area. 9 In space Instruction 202. place the cursor over the approximate center of the ceiling tiles. 10 Press Esc twice. Notice that the sprinkler schedule updates to show the sprinklers you added in space 202. select the sprinklers that you placed.7 Click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Element panel. while pressing Ctrl.Semi-Recessed Hosted : 1/2" Pendent from the Type Selector drop-down. as shown.Pendent . because it calculates the number of sprinklers needed for each space and the maximum distance between sprinklers. 8 Click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Placement panel ➤ Place on Face to place the sprinkler on the ceiling tile face. Continue placing sprinklers You copy the existing sprinklers to place other sprinklers in spaces 203 and 204. because the schedule indicates that each of those spaces requires a minimum of 3 sprinklers. You can use the Minimum Sprinklers column in the schedule as guidance when you design the fire protection system. and select Sprinkler . and click to place 3 sprinklers.

15 Select points in the 2 spaces to the left. Copies of the sprinklers are placed after you specify the end point. Also. as shown. 14 Select the upper left corner near the copy selection as the copy start point. you place non-hosted sprinklers.12 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. Notice that a border displays to indicate the copy selection. and that Copy and Multiple are selected. Next. 282 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . and then press Esc. the cursor changes to indicate that the Copy tool is active. 13 On the Options Bar. verify that Constrain is cleared.

FP_Ceiling view. it must be positioned above the piping to which it will be connected. and click Element Properties.Fire Protection Plan . 200B. 27 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Clear Group And Associate. and select Sprinkler-Upright : 1/2" Upright from the Type Selector drop-down. and 200C). 21 Click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Element panel. it’s added to the space at an offset of 0' 0". You place the system components based on the design requirements (sprinkler count and spacing) indicated in the schedule. Array sprinklers 26 With the sprinkler still selected. specify a vertical offset. and press Enter. enter 10' 6". Next. 25 Click OK. enter 11. by adding the minimum number of sprinklers for the 3 corridor spaces combined. click to place a sprinkler at the beginning of the corridor as shown. 16 Close the ceiling plan view. enter 14' 6". open Design ➤ FP . click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Array. 28 Click the center of the existing sprinkler as the start point. 17 In the Project Browser. 23 Right-click the sprinkler. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. 29 Press Esc. 20 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Sprinkler. Notice that the schedule updates. and array the sprinklers in the 3 spaces that comprise the Corridor (200A. 19 In the floor plan.Place non-hosted sprinklers In this section. for Offset. Adding Sprinklers | 283 . Because the sprinkler is not hosted. indicating that the design requirements for the corridor spaces have been met. zoom in to the entire wing in the lower right of the building. Because this is an upright sprinkler with its connector facing down. 18 Type WT. and then tile the floor plan and schedule views horizontally. For Number.Design. This number is determined in the schedule.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . you place non-hosted sprinklers. and then click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. you adjust the offset. move the cursor to the right. under Constraints. 22 In the 200A Corridor space. This specifies an elevation for the sprinkler that makes it visible in the Level 2 .

However. Then you simplify the layout using Modify tools from the Generate Layout tab on the ribbon to modify pipe branches prior to converting the layout to piping. 284 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System .Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . you create a wet sprinkler system and add piping to connect the sprinklers that you placed. Unlike logical connections (systems). A system is the logical connection between system components such as sprinklers. You create fire protection systems by placing sprinklers. In the left pane of the Open dialog. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . In this exercise. IMPORTANT All system components are logically connected either by a system that you create or by a default system. and with piping (physical connection). physical connections (piping) are not required for systems designing. This is the recommended workflow or best practice for systems creation in Revit MEP. In the next exercise. you use the Layout Path tools to create the initial layout for the piping. you connect the sprinklers by creating a system (logical connection).Fire Protection Plan . you placed 2 types of sprinklers using various placement methods. Creating a Piping System In this exercise.rvt. and then creating the logical connection between these system components. indicating that it’s the active view.30 Close the file with or without saving it. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses including flow and pressure. piping is necessary to perform calculations that reference the physical pipe geometry such as sizing. 1 In the Project Browser. click Training Files.Design is highlighted. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_02_i. After creating the logical connection.

they are moved from the Unassigned folder to their respective assigned system folder. Connect sprinklers with a system 7 Draw a selection box (from left to right) around the sprinklers in the office spaces. 6 Expand the Unassigned ➤ Default Fire Protection Wet 1 system to view the level 2 sprinklers that you placed in the building. 4 Drag the System Browser so that it docks at the bottom of the drawing area.2 Zoom in to the wing at the lower right of the building. 8 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Fire Protection Wet to create a fire protection wet system. Creating a Piping System | 285 . The wet system that logically connects the sprinklers displays in red to indicate that the new system is selected. Keep the System Browser open and refer to it as you create systems. Explore the System Browser 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. as shown. This occurs because each system component must be assigned to a system after it is placed in order to perform calculations such as flow. It does not indicate a pipe layout path. click View ➤ Systems. IMPORTANT System components that you place are initially located under a default system category in the Unassigned folder. 5 Right-click the header. and select Piping. and assign the selected sprinklers to it. In the System Browser. within the Piping Systems folder. As you assign sprinklers to systems. The Fire Protection Wet system is created and listed in the System Browser. all of the selected sprinklers have been moved from the Default Fire Protection Wet folder to the new system folder. named Fire Protection Wet.

Verify that the above pipe type and offset settings are the same for Branch. The Generate Layout tools are activated. verify that Pipe Types: Fire Protection . The Edit Piping System panel displays. 10 Right-click Fire Protection Wet 1. Revit MEP uses these settings to convert the preview layout path to physical piping. and on the Options Bar. 16 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. select Branch. NOTE The Generate Layout feature is available whenever a system component is selected. Confirm and validate the system 9 In the System Browser. 286 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . In the left pane. 12 On the Options Bar. indicating the logical connection. you use the System Browser to confirm and validate the system. This offset elevation places the pipe main at 9 feet above level 2. You can now view the fire protection system hierarchy: the Fire Protection Wet 1 system logically connects the sprinklers. press Tab. 18 In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. select an initial piping layout. click Settings. expand Fire Protection Wet ➤ FP Wet_Zone2 to see the included sprinklers. Notice that the Options Bar allows you to verify or modify the system name. and a piping layout preview displays. for System Name. click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. 13 In the System Browser. verify that 9' 0" is specified. and click Select. 14 Click Finish Editing System. You also verify the pipe conversion settings that you configured earlier in this tutorial. 11 With the system still selected. and make preliminary modifications to simplify the piping layout. Next. double-click the Fire Protection Wet 1 system listing to view the list of sprinklers. verify that Main is selected. and select the system. For Offset. 15 In the drawing area. select a sprinkler that belongs to FP Wet_Zone2. you create piping to physically connect the sprinklers. For Pipe Type. and number of elements in the system. system equipment. ■ ■ NOTE The branch offset allows you to automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. enter FP Wet_Zone2.Wet is selected. The selected fire protection wet system highlights in red. TIP If you click in the drawing area and the red system display clears. 17 Click Generate Layout tab ➤ Generate Layout panel ➤ Solutions. Create the initial layout The Layout Paths tools let you specify a source for the system. place the cursor over a sprinkler. 19 Click OK. providing system editing tools.Now that the sprinklers are logically connected.

verify that Network is selected. Modify the layout 26 You use the Modify tool to customize and simplify the layout. click Solutions. these settings will convert the base component to a 2" riser that extends from the bottom of Level 1 up to the connection with the level 2 sprinklers (9' 0"). the method for moving segments in a layout depends on the type of connection between a branch and the main piping: ■ Use (parallel movement control) to move the branch when an displays at the junction. 21 Click in the upper right corner of the stairwell to place the base component. The main piping preview connects to the base component in the stairwell. (elbow control) Creating a Piping System | 287 . The base component provides a source for the fire protection system. for Diameter. The layout path solution displays (blue represents the main piping run. enter -12' 0". 24 On the Generate Layout panel. 25 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For Solution Type. and green represents branch lines). select 2". In general. Use the arrow keys to view all the solutions. as shown. When the layout is finished. 22 On the Options Bar. 23 For Offset. click Place Base. and select solution 5.20 On the Generate Layout panel.

as shown. and then drag the (elbow junction control) to merge the piping preview. 27 Select the horizontal layout path segment connecting to the base point. On the Generate Layout panel.■ Move each end separately when either a (tee junction control) or (cross junction control) displays at the junction. A (parallel movement control) displays. All of the fittings required to connect the pipes to the system components are automatically generated. click Modify. 288 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . The pipe run geometry (main and branches) is created. First drag the tee or cross junction control to the desired location. 28 Drag the parallel movement control up to a point between the office/corridor walls and the corridor sprinklers. 29 Click Finish Layout. This pipe run physically connects the wet system sprinklers for the 3 offices on level 2.

you complete the wet system by adding the remaining sprinklers to the FP Wet_Zone2 system using the Layout Path tool.IMPORTANT Errors may occur when you attempt to create pipe geometry during layout path conversion or pipe sizing. and various manual pipe creation tools. you complete the level 2 wet fire protection system. click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Thin Lines. 32 If necessary. View the system in 3D 30 Open FP . and then you create piping to physically connect them. Next.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Fire Protection. or that offset elevations are incorrect. 33 Close the file with or without saving it. The most common causes of these errors are that there is insufficient space to create a pipe or a fitting. Either relocate the system components. 31 Zoom in to the area with the sprinkler system. You add the remaining sprinklers to the current wet system to logically connect them. the Connect Into tool. select a different layout solution. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System In this exercise. or manually modify the pipe. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System | 289 .

and select the elbow fitting as shown. click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Thin Lines.rvt.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . 1 In the Project Browser. indicating that it’s the active view. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . 290 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_03_i. 2 Zoom in.Design is highlighted. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 4 Click the left plus sign to upgrade the fitting to a tee.Fire Protection Plan . 3 If necessary.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.

air terminals. The layout automatically creates a path connecting to the tee created earlier. 11 On the Generate Layout panel. System tools display on the Piping Systems tab. you can select the pipe or duct. IMPORTANT After system components (sprinklers. verify that Network is selected. click Finish Editing System. 8 In the corridor. 18 Click Finish Editing System. and pipe or duct is created. 9 On the Edit System panel. 6 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System so that you can add sprinklers to the system.The tee provides an open connector that will serve as a base when laying out the piping for the sprinklers in the corridor. and select solution 5. 10 Select a sprinkler in the corridor. You can confirm the sprinkler system assignment in the floor plan view or in the System Browser. mechanical equipment. Connect the sprinklers with pipe 19 Zoom to the 3 spaces at the right end of the corridor. and click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. radiators. 13 Click Finish Layout. draw a selection box from lower left to upper right around the sprinklers as shown (don’t include the last 3 sprinklers). 5 In the drawing area. 17 Use a selection box to select the remaining 3 sprinklers. 16 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. verify that Solutions is selected. 14 Close the System Browser. Notice that the number of system elements updates on the Options Bar. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System | 291 . This allows you to modify the system (logical connection). or a system component to display system tools. for Solution Type. and so on) are logically connected by a system. 7 On the Edit Piping System panel. Add remaining sprinklers to FP Wet_Zone2 system 15 In the drawing area. click Add To System. select a sprinkler that is part of the FP Wet_Zone2 system. select any sprinkler that is part of the FP Wet_Zone2 system. 12 On the Options Bar. The selected sprinklers are assigned to FP Wet_Zone2.

and then tile the views. and select the leftmost unconnected sprinkler. pan and zoom to the next unconnected sprinkler. 25 Select the sprinkler. draw pipe from the last unconnected sprinkler to the main pipe. 21 In the Piping Plan. 27 On the Options Bar.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Fire Protection. 23 View the result in the 3D view.20 Open Design ➤ FP . for Offset. zoom in to the corridor above the spaces that have piping. and select Pipe Types: Fire Protection .Wet from the Type Selector drop-down. 292 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . 26 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Element panel. select 9'. click the intersection with the horizontal main pipe as the pipe endpoint. and then press Esc. and select the horizontal segment of main piping as shown. 28 In the drawing area. and click Draw Pipe. right-click. Notice that horizontal and vertical segments of pipe were added. 29 Using the same method. 24 In the Piping Plan. 22 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into.

and press Tab twice to highlight the entire system. 33 Close the file with or without saving it. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System | 293 . 32 Use the cursor to highlight a section of the pipe.Layout in 2D Layout in 3D Verify connectivity 30 Close the 3D view. zoom so that you can see the entire wing with the fire protection system. it’s a visual indication that all components are connected correctly. Because the whole system highlights. 31 In the plan view.

and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_04_i. You also place a hose reel cabinet in the building and connect it to the supply standpipe. 2 Zoom to the offices in the lower right corner. 4 On the Options Bar. Click at the staircase to specify the section line endpoint. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . 3 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Section.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 .rvt. 294 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . for Scale. Create a section view 1 In the Project Browser.Fire Protection Plan . click Training Files.Design is highlighted. click outside the corridor wall at the stairs to specify the section line start point. indicating that it’s the active view. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Specify section properties 7 In the drawing area. double-click on the section head to open the section view. ■ 6 Press Esc. 5 Draw the section: ■ In the drawing area.Adding Vertical Supply Piping In this exercise. you create a section view that you will use to work with vertical piping. select 1/4" = 1'-0".

8 Right-click, and click View Properties. 9 In the Instance Properties dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Under Graphics, for Sub-Discipline, select FP - Design. For View Classification, select Design. Under Identity Data, for View Name, enter FP Section_Stair. For Default View Template, select MEP Section. Click OK.

10 In the Project Browser, right-click Design ➤ FP - Design ➤ Sections ➤ FP Section_Stair, and click Apply Default View Template. 11 Zoom to the top near the horizontal pipe. 12 If necessary, drag the top section boundary line up. 13 Select the elbow fitting, and then click the top + grip to upgrade the elbow fitting to a tee. 14 Select the tee fitting, and then right-click the top connector, and click Draw Pipe. 15 Press Spacebar. 16 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Element panel, and select Pipe Types: Fire Protection - Wet from the Type Selector drop-down. 17 Move the cursor up, enter 7', and press Enter.

Adding Vertical Supply Piping | 295

18 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 19 Make Level 2 - Fire Protection Plan - Design the active view. Add mechanical equipment 20 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. 21 Click Place Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel, and select M_Hose Reel Cabinet Surface Mounted : 1"25mm from the drop-down list. 22 In the drawing area, click on the wall (host face) near the stairs to place the cabinet as shown, and then click Modify.

23 In the section view, zoom to the hose reel cabinet. 24 Select the cabinet, right-click the connector on the left of the cabinet, and click Draw Pipe.

296 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System

25 Verify that Fire Protection - Wet is selected from the Type Selector drop-down. 26 On the Options Bar, for Diameter, select 2"50mm. 27 On the Placement Tools panel, verify that Automatically Connect is active. 28 Connect to the vertical pipe (using the Intersection and Horizontal snaps), and then click Modify.

29 Close the section view. Add a valve 30 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Accessory. 31 In the alert dialog, click Yes to load a family. 32 In the Open dialog, navigate to Training\Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\Gate Valve - 2-12 Inch.rfa, and click Open. 33 In the Type Selector, verify that Gate Valve - 2" is selected. 34 Select the midpoint of the horizontal pipe that extends from the cabinet, as shown, and then click Modify.

Adding Vertical Supply Piping | 297

A 2" gate valve is placed in the 2" diameter pipe.

35 Open 3D Fire Protection, and zoom in to the cabinet to see the valve in 3D.

36 Close the file with or without saving it.

298 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System

Modifying Pipe Diameters
In this exercise, you modify the diameter of the pipes so that the pipes are a better fit with the design specifications. Because the pipe diameters depend on the number of sprinklers, you also create a sprinkler schedule to report the number of level 2 sprinklers. Training File
■ ■

Click

➤ Open ➤ Project.

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_05_i.rvt.

Tile the views 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP - Design ➤ 3D Views, and double-click 3D Fire Protection to make it the active view. 2 Enter WT to tile the 3D and floor plan views, and arrange them so that they’re tiled horizontally. 3 Adjust the view in both windows to view the entire fire protection pipe run as shown. You will work primarily in the floor plan view and validate the pipe geometry in the 3D view.

NOTE It is important to recognize the distinction between sizing and manually changing the diameter, height, or width. Changing the diameter, width, or height of pipe on the Options Bar is not considered sizing in Revit MEP. Sizing is performed using the Sizing tool (Sizing dialog) to size the pipe based on a series of parameters and calculations. The calculated size of a pipe is the result of the Sizing tool and not the result of a manual change of diameter, width, or height. Modify the diameter of the fire protection pipe run The majority of the pipe segments service no more than 2 sprinklers, and because the design specifications require a 1 inch diameter for pipes servicing 2 sprinklers, it’s more efficient to specify 1 inch diameter for all pipe runs, and then adjust branches servicing more than 2 sprinklers separately. 4 In the floor plan view, starting at the lower left corner of the wing, draw a selection box around the level 2 fire protection piping until just past the section line (don’t include the supply pipe or hose reel cabinet).

Modifying Pipe Diameters | 299

5 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 6 In the Filter dialog, click Check None, select Pipe Fittings and Pipes, and click OK. 7 On the Options Bar, for Diameter, select 1". 8 Click Modify. All selected piping is now 1" diameter.

Tag the pipes 9 In the floor plan view, zoom in to the right half of the wing (including the stairs). 10 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 11 Click to select a segment of pipe in the corridor. 12 If necessary, click Yes to load tags in the alert dialog, . 13 Navigate to Training\Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\Pipe Size Tag.rfa, and click Open. 14 On the Options Bar:
■ ■

Verify that Horizontal is selected. Clear Leader.

15 Place the cursor over the pipe segments shown, and after each segment highlights, click to place the tag. The tags accurately display the size of the selected pipe segments.

NOTE Tags are view specific. They display only in the view in which they were placed. Press Esc.

300 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System

Modify the diameter of the main 16 In the 3D view, select the linked architectural file. 17 On the View Control Bar, click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Category. By hiding the linked file, you isolate the piping to make it easier to select. 18 In the 3D view, select the vertical pipe below the hose cabinet.

19 Place the cursor over the section of main pipe feeding the last sprinkler, and when the section highlights, press Tab. This highlights the piping between the vertical pipe and the last segement. 20 Click to select the main piping between these points. The main piping is selected and displays in red.

Modifying Pipe Diameters | 301

21 On the Options Bar. 302 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . The diameter of the fire protection main piping changes. for Diameter. select 4".

change the diameter of the other top segments to 1 1/4" to accommodate sprinklers. 25 On the Options Bar. select 1 1/4". 23 Close the 3D view. The pipe diameter is modified. and then tag the piping as shown.22 Click in the floor plan to make it the active view. for Diameter. 24 In the drawing area. Modifying Pipe Diameters | 303 . 26 Using the same method. select the top segment of branch pipe in space Instruction 202 (next to the stairs). as shown. and maximize the floor plan. Modify the diameter of branch pipes The number of sprinklers serviced by a branch determines the pipe size used for that branch.

In this tutorial. The pipe run now complies with the design criteria. use the methods that you learned and create the level 1 fire protection wet system. In this exercise.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ 05_Fire Protection Systems folder under Training Files. 28 Close the file with or without saving it. and the difference between how the software sizes pipe and how to manually modify pipe diameter. you created a wet fire protection system. 304 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . You learned how to manually change the diameter of a pipe. For additional practice. The completed fire protection system is included in the RME_FP_Design_06_i. Feel free to modify the systems or create entirely new fire protection systems. You added tags to pipes. Use the same system components and parameters as you did for level 2. Explore different system designs and discover the power of Revit MEP.27 This completes the Fire Protection tutorial. You also learned the difference between creating rigid physical pipe connections and creating logical systems. you used various selection methods to modify the level 2 fire protection pipe run diameters. allowing you to immediately verify the pipe diameters.

Documenting a Project In this tutorial. add annotations and dimensions. and create schedules for construction documentation for a project. create details. 305 . you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to create views.

306 .

Duplicating Plan Views In this exercise. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. You then change the properties of the new view by applying a view template. dependent views. a plumbing isometric riser from a 3D design view. you duplicate an existing floor plan view to create a duct plan view. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_01_i. you begin the construction documentation for the building project. and view references. Duplicate the Level 1 floor plan to create a Level 1 duct plan 1 In the Project Browser. enter Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. and click OK. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . right-click Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan.Design ➤ Floor Plans. and click Rename. callout views for a typical HVAC view and a detail view.rvt. right-click Copy of Level 1. You learn to create: ■ ■ ■ ■ a duplicate plan view. You select Duplicate because only model elements are included in the original view. matchlines. 2 In the Project Browser. and click Properties. under Floor Plans. and apply a view template. you’d select Duplicate with Detailing. 307 . 3 In the Rename View dialog. click Training Files. Apply a view template 4 In the Project Browser. If the view included detail graphics.Creating Documentation Views 13 In this lesson. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. right-click Level 1.

2 Right-click the dependent view title. Dependent views keep the primary/parent view as the working drawing and allow you to create smaller. You crop a dependent view to show only the area marked by the matchline. create dependent views for areas B and C. right-click Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. 6 In the Project Browser. Creating Dependent Views Because large buildings cannot fit on a single sheet at 1/8" = 1' scale. and then press Esc.5 In the Instance Properties dialog. and the floor plan is moved to its new location in the Project Browser hierarchy. 6 Click View tab ➤ Sheet Composition panel ➤ Matchline. This is useful when breaking up plans with varying geometries across levels. 10 In the drawing area. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_02_i. In the left pane of the Open dialog. to delineate splits in a large floor plan. 9 Click OK. as shown. under Identity Data ➤ Default View Template. views and put them on the sheet. 7 Click Create Matchline Sketch tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Matchline Properties. and click OK. more focused. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. The smaller (dependent) views inherit view properties and view-specific elements from the primary view. click to specify the first point of the matchline to the left of the plan and below gridline C. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Create matchlines Matchlines are used with dependent views. enter Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_A. click Training Files.rvt. select HVAC Duct Plan-Documentation. 5 Make sure Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan is the active view. right-click Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. The view is automatically updated with the defined graphical style. and click OK. 308 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . Duplicate a view to create dependent views 1 In the Project Browser. 11 Click beyond the exterior wall of the wing to specify the second point. 3 In the Rename View dialog. and click Rename. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog. verify that the top and bottom constraints are Unlimited. You can modify the visibility of matchlines in specific views. and click Apply Default View Template. you use dependent views to accommodate such large buildings. 4 Using the same method.

on the Options Bar. 19 In the drawing area. 16 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Object Styles. 17 On the Annotation Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog. select Double Dash 5/8". For Line Weight. 20 Select the upper view reference and. Creating view references 18 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ View Reference. for Target view. For Line Pattern. select 11. 14 Click Finish Matchline. select black. In the Color dialog. apply Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_B to the other view reference. 21 Using the same method. click the current value. Modify object styles 15 Zoom in to the left part of the upper matchline. and click OK. 13 Press Esc twice. select Matchline: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Line Color. click above and below the modified matchline to create view references (displayed as .12 Draw a second matchline that spans the floor plan above gridline H./ ---). Creating Dependent Views | 309 . select Floor Plan: Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_A. Click OK. and then press Esc.

indicating the detail and sheet number of each view. and zoom to each of the view references. 23 Open Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_A. 28 Make Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan the active view. 310 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . drag Plan_B onto Sheet M202 and Plan_C onto Sheet M203.22 Add a view reference below the lower matchline. and apply Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_C to it. The view references in the primary view are automatically updated as the views are placed on sheets. 24 Use the grips on the crop lines to modify the view boundaries. 27 Using the same method. and drag Plan_A from the Project Browser onto the sheet. 25 Using the same method. Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_B Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_C 26 Open Sheet M201. as shown. crop the dependent views for plans B and C.

8 Highlight a segment of the top horizontal piping. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. for View Classification.rvt. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_03_i. and click Properties. 6 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Domestic Water. for View Name. press Tab twice to highlight the pipe run. 3 Click Modify Section Boxes tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Pin. The section crop lines no longer display. select Plumbing. For Sub-Discipline. 2 Zoom in. right-click Copy of 3D Plumbing.Domestic Water. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing-Design ➤ 3D Views. you copy a 3D design view and modify it to create a 3D plumbing isometric riser for domestic water. click Training Files. and select the section box. 4 In the Project Browser. select Documentation. enter Plumbing Isometric . Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser | 311 . right-click 3D Plumbing. For Default View Template. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. select Plumbing Isometric. Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser In this exercise. and click to select it. 5 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. You pin the view to keep it from being moved inadvertently. 7 Zoom in to the plumbing system.29 Close the file with or without saving it. Duplicate a view and specify properties 1 In the Project Browser. right-click Plumbing Isometric . and click Apply Default View Template. Click OK. Under Graphics.

10 In the View-Specific Element Graphics dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Weight. For Pattern. Click Apply. change the line weight to 4 and the line pattern to Dash Dot 3/16". press Tab 3 times. and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Element. select 3. 312 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . and click to select it. 11 Select the vertical segment of pipe coming off the tankless water heater. The selected piping displays as a dashed line. and then click OK.9 Right-click. 12 Using the same method. select Dash.

Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser | 313 . This hides the sanitary piping in order to create a domestic water supply riser isometric view. and click Hide in View ➤ Elements. 14 Right-click. press Tab 3 times (until the entire pipe network highlights. as shown).13 Highlight a segment of horizontal pipe below the sinks. and click to select it.

click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. and rename the new view Plumbing Isometric . click Reveal Hidden Elements. 314 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . 16 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text.Domestic Water view with detailing. ■ ■ ■ Hide domestic cold water and domestic hot water piping. On the View Control Bar. 18 Using methods learned previously.Sanitary Waste. and then click in empty space in the drawing to end the label. highlight a segment of the sanitary piping. click Close Reveal Hidden Elements. 17 Label the fixtures as shown. and click Unhide in view ➤ Elements. Unhide the sanitary waste piping: ■ ■ ■ ■ On the View Control Bar.15 Press Esc. Right-click. create a sanitary riser isometric view: ■ Duplicate the Plumbing Isometric . In the drawing area. On the View Control Bar. Click in the drawing area to start a text label. press Tab 3 times. and click to select it.

22 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimension panel ➤ Spot Slope. In the Format dialog. For Slope. and click to place the spot slope annotation. the callout head on the original view is updated with the sheet information. for Rounding. you use a plan view to create a callout view. click on the Format value. 25 Press Esc twice. 21 Click OK twice. When the view is associated with a sheet. 23 Click on the horizontal pipe below the sinks to select it. select To the nearest 1/8". 20 In the Project Units dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Discipline.Add a spot slope annotation 19 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Units. verify that Common is selected. Creating Callout Views | 315 . 26 Close the file with or without saving it. Creating Callout Views In this exercise. and then place the callout view on a sheet. as shown. 24 Move the cursor above the pipe.

7 Modify the callout leader: ■ ■ Select the callout boundary. 6 Draw the callout around the ductwork as shown. Create a floor plan callout 1 In the Project Browser. select 1/4"=1'-0''.rvt. 2 Zoom in to an office in Area C (the bottom section of the plan). verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan is highlighted. 3 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Callout. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_04_i. 316 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . 4 Click Callout tab ➤ Element panel. for Scale.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 5 On the Options Bar. indicating that it’s the active view. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and select Floor Plan from the Type Selector drop-down. and move it to the bottom right corner of the boundary. beginning at the upper left and ending at the lower right. Select the Drag Head control (the control on the leader line that is closest to the callout head). click Training Files.

13 In the Project Browser. select 5. 10 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Object Styles. under Sheets (all). Modify callout boundary line weight 9 Press Esc to clear the selection. double-click M601 . Creating Callout Views | 317 . 11 On the Annotation Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog: ■ For the Callout Boundary category. select Callout of Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. using the same method. Click OK. drag it to the sheet.8 Create an angled leader line by dragging the Drag control located at the center of the leader as shown. ■ Expand the Callout Boundary category and. and click in the empty space at the top center to place it. change the line weight for the Callout Leader Line to 5. for Line Weight. ■ Place the view on a sheet 12 In the Project Browser.HVAC Duct Plan & Sections.

For Title on Sheet. Click OK. and click Apply Default View Template. 16 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. right-click the callout view. The display of the ductwork changes from coarse detail to fine. and select the viewport. For Default View Template. enter Callout of Level 1 HVAC WSHP TYP. select HVAC Duct Detail-Documentation. 15 Click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. for View Name. enter WSHP PART PLAN.Rename the detail view and modify view settings 14 Zoom to the callout view. 17 In the Project Browser. Ductwork in coarse detail 318 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views .

Creating Callout Views | 319 .Ductwork in fine detail Create a detail callout 18 Open Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. 20 Double-click the section head at the left of the stairs to open Room 214 Section. The detail callout head has been updated with sheet information. 19 Zoom in to the area near the central stairs and section markers.

enter Typical WSHP Detail. 25 In the Project Browser. 23 Draw the callout boundary around the level 1 ductwork as shown. and click OK.Design ➤ Detail Views (Detail). 320 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . and click Rename. 28 In the Apply View Template dialog.21 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Callout. 27 Right-click Typical WSHP Detail. 26 In the Rename View dialog. 29 Close the file with or without saving it. 22 Click Callout tab ➤ Element panel. and select Detail from the Type Selector drop-down. and click Apply View Template. select HVAC Duct Detail-Documentation. 24 Double-click the callout head to open the detail view. right-click the detail view. and click OK. The view is changed to a hidden line display and is moved to its new position in the Project Browser hierarchy. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . under Names.

symbols.Working with Annotations and Dimensions 14 In this lesson. linetypes. and annotation to create a legend. you learn how to: ■ add text notes. ■ work with model-based components. duct tags. and diffuser tags to an HVAC documentation plan. ■ create permanent dimensions in a lighting plan so that you can control the location of specific fixtures. 321 .

you work with tag and leader types to create an annotated HVAC documentation plan.rvt. 6 Click to start the text note in between 2 of the branch ducts serving the perimeter supply air grilles. double-click Level 2 HVAC Duct Plan to make it the active view. 8 With the text still selected.Creating Annotations In this exercise. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and select 3/32" Arial from the Type Selector drop-down. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Annotations_01_i. 322 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . under Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ Floor Plans. 4 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. 5 Click Place Text tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ (Center). use the drag grips to modify the text box width and position it so that it doesn’t cross the ductwork or wall. 2 Zoom in to the offices in the lower right corner of the building in Area C. and enter RUN DUCT THROUGH OPEN WEB JOISTS. 3 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. click Training Files. as shown. 7 Click anywhere in the view to finish editing. Add a text note to an HVAC documentation plan 1 In the Project Browser.

Creating Annotations | 323 . and then click Right Straight. verify that Leader is cleared. 16 In the drawing area. 15 On the Options Bar. and a segment of rectangular duct.9 Press Esc twice. Use the leader segment grips to create horizontal leader segments from the text box. 13 Press Esc to clear the selection. Add diffuser and duct tags by category 14 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 12 Use the leader end grips to drag the arrows to point to the 2 branch ducts. select a supply diffuser. a segment of round duct. 11 Click Modify Text Notes tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ Add Leader: Left Straight. a return diffuser. Add leaders 10 Select the text box. as shown.

Tag remaining diffusers 18 Using the same method. Place a loaded tag and modify its orientation In order to display additional information about an element. you can annotate the element with a second tag type. and click Open. 21 In the Load Family dialog. move diffuser tags off the ductwork. 24 On the Options Bar. clear Leader. select Bottom Elevation Duct Tag. verify that the Loaded Tag is Bottom Elevation Duct Tag. and click OK. 17 Click Modify. navigate to Annotations ➤ Duct.rfa. 324 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . for Ducts. click Load. Load tags from library 19 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel drop-down ➤ Loaded Tags. 20 In the Tags dialog. 23 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. under Category. If necessary. 22 In the Tags dialog. tag the remaining diffusers in the area.rfa and Flex Duct Tag Round.The information on each tag varies according to the category of element.

open Documentation ➤ HVAC-Pipe ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 HVAC Pipe Plan ➤ Level 1 HVAC Pipe Plan_A. select the large horizontal segment of rectangular duct and the round duct.25 In the drawing area. Creating Annotations | 325 . Leader. and then press Esc. as shown. select Horizontal. 30 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. specify Tag Orientation as Vertical. 31 On the Options Bar. 26 On the Options Bar. 27 Select the large segment of rectangular duct connected to the WSHP. 32 In the drawing area. Place tags with leaders 28 In the Project Browser. 29 Zoom in to the piping near the stairs in the upper right corner of the building in Area A. select the select the large pipe on the right as shown. and Attached End.

34 In the drawing area. for Leader. 35 Click above and to the right of the leader start point to place the leader as shown.33 On the Options Bar. as shown. click the top horizontal pipe in the corridor. select Free End. 326 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions .

38 Click Modify Pipe Tags tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. 39 In the Type Properties dialog. 40 Using the method learned previously. you use temporary dimensions to locate. tag the bottom horizontal pipe as shown. not simply an instance property. select the last tag placed. for Leader Arrowhead. 37 In the drawing area. and click OK.36 Press Esc twice. Edit a tag type You edit the type properties for the pipe size tag so that you can specify a different leader style. and all elements of that type are affected. Creating Dimensions In this exercise. Notice that the new tags you place use the new style. and lock lighting fixtures. Creating Dimensions | 327 . lay out. select Dot Open 1/16". and the tags placed previously have changed to the new style as well. 41 Close the file with or without saving it. That’s because you changed a type property.

and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Annotations_02_i.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. notice that Prefer : Wall faces is selected. click Training Files. Continue the dimension string using the Edit Witness Lines feature 7 In the drawing area.rvt. 2 Zoom in to the left side of the plan. 9 Select the reference line at the center of the next fixture to the right. select the dimension line. 3 Select the upper left lighting fixture. 12 Press Esc. and then select the interior face of the wall. indicating that it’s the active view. 5 Click to create a permanent dimension. Lay out lighting fixtures using temporary and permanent dimensions 1 In the Project Browser. On the Options Bar. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 328 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . drag the witness line on the right to the face of the wall on the left side of the selected lighting fixture. 11 Click in any empty space in the drawing area to finish. You can modify the preferred condition for dimension face selection. 4 Using the Move Witness Line control. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 Lighting Plan ➤ Level 1 Lighting Plan_A is highlighted. 10 Repeat for the remaining 2 top fixtures. 8 Click Modify Dimensions tab ➤ Witness Lines panel ➤ Edit Witness Lines. 6 Press Esc to clear the selection.

add dimension strings for the remaining 2 rows of lighting fixtures in the room. Creating a Legend | 329 . 20 Close the file with or without saving it. 16 Press Esc.3 1/2"). Because the dimensions are locked. 18 Select the dimension value (7' . 15 To lock the dimensions between the interior fixtures. you create an HVAC Sheet Metal legend using model-based legend components. 19 Using the same methods. Training File ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. linework. click the 3 interior locks on the line. annotation symbols. enter 8'. lock the dimensions of the interior fixtures for the remaining 2 rows. and offset them 8' from the wall.13 Using the same method. the fixtures shift to maintain constraints. Modify dimensions to offset fixtures 17 Select the right lighting fixture in the center line. Creating a Legend In this exercise. and notes. and press Enter. Lock dimensions between fixtures 14 Select the center dimension line.

Create a legend view 1 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Legends drop-down ➤ Legend. select Air Terminals : Supply Diffuser . 2 In the New Legend View dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Name.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog.Rectangular Face Round Neck : 24x24 . click below the title to place the diffuser. 8 On the Options Bar: ■ For Family. For View. Add model element detail components 7 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Component drop-down ➤ Legend Component.8 Neck. and enter DIFFUSER LEGEND. enter Diffuser Legend. and select 1/4" Arial from the Type Selector drop-down. place: ■ ■ ■ Air Terminals : Return Diffuser : 24 x 24 Face 12 x 12 Connection Air Terminals : Exhaust Grill : 24 x 24 Face 12 x 12 Connection Air Terminals : Supply Diffuser .rvt. 4 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. 6 Click Place Text tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. Click OK. select Floor Plan. 10 Using the same method. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Annotations_03_i. click Training Files. For Scale. Create a legend title 3 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text.Sidewall : 18 x 8 330 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . 5 Click in the drawing area. ■ 9 In the drawing area. select 1/4" = 1' -0".

13 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. annotate the remaining components: ■ ■ ■ RETURN DIFFUSER EXHAUST GRILL SIDEWALL SUPPLY DIFFUSER 16 Click Modify.11 Press Esc. and enter SUPPLY DIFFUSER. click next to the top diffuser. 14 In the drawing area. Creating a Legend | 331 . and select 1/8" Arial from the Type Selector drop-down list. 15 Using the same method and using the blue dashed reference lines for alignment. Add detail component text descriptions 12 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text.

RISE symbol for the copy start point. 26 Press Esc. 25 Select the center reference line as the mirror line. The selected detail lines are now thin. 332 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . 22 Zoom in to the copied component. 28 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Element panel.DROP symbol to specify the copy end point. 23 Delete the arrow and the left 3 lines at the center of the component. open HVAC_SM_DUCT_CONDITION legend view. select Thin Lines from the Line Style drop-down. select the top and bottom detail lines on the left side of the component.DROP and its text note. and then click the top left corner of the ELEVATION INCLINE . and then press Esc. 24 Select the component’s break line. 21 Press Esc. 29 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Symbol. 18 Select the ELEVATION INCLINE . 19 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 27 While pressing Ctrl.Create a legend symbol 17 In the Project Browser. and click Modify Detail Items tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Mirror. 20 Click the top left corner of the ELEVATION INCLINE .

in the Ductwork-Sheet Metal column. 38 Drag Diffuser Legend from the Project Browser to the bottom of the sheet. and then click Modify. enter E. double-click Sheets (all) ➤ M100 . 32 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. 33 Click to the left of the left break line. 31 Click below the center of the bottom component to place the symbol. 35 Change the text on the right to N. and then click Modify. Creating a Legend | 333 .30 Select Spot Elevation . Place legend views on a sheet 37 In the Project Browser.Target Filled from the Type Selector drop-down.MECHANICAL LEGEND. 34 Using the method learned previously. mirror the text on the center reference line of the component. 36 Click anywhere in the view to finish editing. and then change the text note to CONNECT NEW DUCT TO EXISTING DUCT.

39 With the viewport still selected. 40 Press Esc. click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel. 41 Close the file with or without saving it. 334 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . and select No Title from the Type Selector drop-down.

A detail callout that references another view.rvt. Tag electrical panels 1 In the Project Browser. A drafting detail by importing a CAD detail. and text. A 3D isometric detail view of a typical WSHP Make Up detail. 335 . click Training Files. 2 Double-click the right elevation head to open the Power Riser . you will create: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ A model-based detail of an electrical power riser diagram. indicating that it’s the active view.Detailing 15 In this lesson. A drafting view using detail components. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ Power ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 Power Plan ➤ Level 1 Power Plan_B is highlighted. In the left pane of the Open dialog.113 East elevation view. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Creating a Model-Based Electrical Riser Diagram Detail In this exercise. detail groups. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_01_i. you place elevation views on a sheet and then arrange them as a single view in preparation of creating a one-line diagram.

336 | Chapter 15 Detailing . you place both the North and East elevation views on a sheet.Electrical Power Riser Diagram to make it the active view. 7 Drag the Power Riser . and click to place it.113 East on the sheet.113 North elevation view from the Project Browser to the empty area at the upper left of sheet E101. clear Leader. 8 Using the same method. 4 On the Options Bar. Notice that the software displays a dashed line so that you can align the views as you place them. 5 In the drawing area. select each of the 2 panelboards. Place the view close to the left edge of the sheet so that there is room in the same space for the east elevation view. double-click Sheets (all) ➤ E101 . and then modify and align the views. place Power Riser .3 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. Place views on a sheet 6 In the Project Browser. Next.

and use the filled circle drag control on the right to drag the end of the level line to the right.9 Press Esc. Modify level lines 11 In the drawing area. 12 Select the Level 1 line. under Identity Data. enter Electrical Power Riser Diagram. Creating a Model-Based Electrical Riser Diagram Detail | 337 . 13 Right-click. and click Activate View. and click Deactivate View. right-click. Modify a viewport title 14 Select the title of the 113 North view. 15 In the Instance Properties dialog. Doing this enables you to later drag the 113 East view to the left. 10 Zoom to the power riser elevations on the sheet. and click OK. giving the appearance of a single view. and click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. select the 113 North view. for Title on Sheet.

and click Activate View. 17 Click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel. You also create a detail group and annotate the diagram. 338 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 22 Press Esc. you use detail lines to create wiring for the one-line electrical riser diagram. You combine views in order to create a one-line diagram. and click Hide in view ➤ Elements. right-click. 21 Using the drag control. right-click. In the next exercise. Align elevation views to resemble a single view 18 In the drawing area.Remove a viewport title display 16 Select the 113 East view. and select No Title from the Type Selector drop-down. 23 Close the file with or without saving it. move the view to the left so that it overlaps the 113 North view. you add wiring to the diagram. Creating Detail Wiring In this exercise. 19 Select the Level 1 line. 20 Select the 113 East elevation view again. select the 113 East elevation view. as shown.

7 Click Place Detail Lines tab ➤ Element panel.Electrical Power Riser Diagram is highlighted. expand Lines. and click OK. 4 In the Line Styles dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Category. verify that Chain is selected. and then click OK. 2 Close the Project Browser.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_02_i. This maximizes the drawing window so that you can more easily add wiring to the riser diagram. In the New Subcategory dialog. 6 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. draw lines to represent the wiring to the switchboard (SWB). 3 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Line Styles.rvt. Draw linework to create a wiring diagram 5 In the drawing area. Creating Detail Wiring | 339 . enter Electrical Power. as shown. for Name. 9 Beginning at the transformer. indicating that it’s the active view.113 North view. click Training Files. 8 On the Options Bar. Under Modify Subcategories. Create a linetype 1 In the Project Browser. select 6. click New. In the Line Styles dialog. notice that there are no snaps active. and select Electrical Power from the Type Selector drop-down. zoom in to the service transformer (T-SVC) located at the bottom left of the Power Riser . verify that Sheets (all) ➤ E101 . As you draw. Zoom in as necessary and use the drag controls to make sure the lines clean up properly. for Line Weight. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

for Offset. enter 1/8". 12 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Offset. 340 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 13 On the Options Bar. as shown.10 Press Esc. 11 Using the same method. 14 Click to place lines offset to the right and above the first 2 lines from the switchboard. add lines to represent wiring between the switchboard and a panel on level 3 (MDP_3).

19 Select the horizontal line to the right of the first line. TIP When you use the Trim tool. Creating Detail Wiring | 341 . 17 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Trim. you select the portion of the line that you want to keep. 16 Draw a line to connect the offset line to MDP_2. so that the result is as shown. 18 Select the vertical detail line that connects into MDP_2 as the first line to trim.15 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line.

21 Zoom in to panel MP-1B. and then copy them to multiple locations in the diagram.20 Continue adding detail lines until the diagram is wired as shown. 342 | Chapter 15 Detailing . Add a break symbol and note You create the break symbol and text note once.

29 Click Modify. and select 3/32" Arial Transparent from the Type Selector drop-down. 24 Draw a “cap” (the break symbol) over the 3 vertical lines at the top of the panel. Copy the symbol and text 30 Select the text. 23 Click Place Detail Lines tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ (Start-End-Radius Arc). and type SEE MECHANICAL CONNECTION SCHEDULE. The name of the detail arc (Start-End-Radius) indicates the order in which you select the defining points of the arc. 28 Click above the cap. Creating Detail Wiring | 343 . 26 Click Place Text tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ No Leader. and then click Alignment panel ➤ Horizontal: (Center). and use the drag controls to resize the text box and position it as shown. as shown. 25 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. 27 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel.22 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line.

344 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 34 Click the endpoint of the left vertical line under the break symbol as the copy start point. 33 On the Options Bar. 32 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 35 Click the endpoint of each of the corresponding lines for the other 2 mechanical panels (MP-2B and MP-3B) as the copy endpoints. select Multiple.31 While pressing Ctrl. select the text and the detail arc of the break symbol.

enter 0 0.36 Press Esc. 43 Click twice to place 2 more lines below the first line. Create a ground wire You use 3 detail lines to create a ground wire symbol. Creating Detail Wiring | 345 . 39 Move the cursor to the right. 41 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Offset. enter 3/32". 42 On the Options Bar. for Offset. and press Enter. You enter exact values for each line length.5. 40 Press Esc. 38 Beginning below the level 1 switchboard. and then press Esc. 37 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. click to specify the start point of the first horizontal line.

enter 0 0. 47 In the drawing area. change the length of the bottom line to 0 0. 49 In the Create Detail Group dialog. Using the same method. and then press Esc. enter Ground. 346 | Chapter 15 Detailing .25. select all 3 lines. Create a detail group By grouping the lines that represent the ground wire. for Name. click on the length dimension value. you can ensure that they stay together. expand Groups ➤ Detail. and press Enter. while pressing Ctrl. Notice that the new Ground group displays in the Project Browser. 50 With the group selected. 48 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Group. 45 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down ➤ Project Browser to open the browser view. 46 In the Project Browser.125. drag the Modify Group Origin control to the midpoint of the top detail line. You can also specify the origin point of the group so that it is placed accurately.44 Edit the offset lines: ■ ■ ■ Select the middle line. and click OK. Press Esc.

and then click the endpoint of the detail line as the move end point. 53 Click the origin of the detail group as the move start point. 54 Select the group. TP-2B. 56 Draw a detail line to connect each ground wire group to its transformer. and click Modify Detail Groups tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move. 55 Click below each of the transformers (TP-1B.51 Using the method learned previously. and click Modify Detail Groups tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Similar. draw a detail line that extends from the bottom right of the switchboard. Creating Detail Wiring | 347 . and TP-3B) to place the ground wire group in those locations. 52 Select the detail group.

Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail In this exercise. and click Rename. 3 In the Rename View dialog. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. select the entire Electrical Riser Power Diagram viewport. Prepare the view 1 In the Project Browser. 348 | Chapter 15 Detailing . for Name. 59 Close the file with or without saving it. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. In later exercises. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_03_i. and will place it on sheet E01. 58 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Pin.Pin wires and view You pin the view and all detail lines so that they don’t get moved accidentally. 4 Right-click the ViewCube.rvt. enter Typical Make Up Air Isometric Detail. 5 Zoom in to view the section. You use a view template to isolate the mechanical components so that you can annotate the detail components. you duplicate an existing view and orient it to a section view in order to create an isometric detail view. click Training Files. you will create the Mechanical Connection Schedule referenced here. 57 Using a crossing window (beginning at lower left and extending to upper right). and click OK. 2 Right-click the copy. and click Orient to View ➤ Sections ➤ Typical Make Up Air. right-click Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Duct & Equipment. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

7 On the ViewCube. Back. and then click the corner where the Top.6 Select the section box. and then press Esc. and drag the top grip down so that the section includes only the first floor. Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail | 349 . click Home. and Left sides converge.

and select 3/32" Arial from the Type Selector drop-down. This isolates the mechanical components by turning off the architectural components.Apply a view template 8 In the Project Browser. select 3D Views. right-click. 13 Click Place Text tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ Two Segments. Walkthroughs. Annotate the view 11 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. right-click Typical Make Up Air Isometric Detail. and click Hide in view ➤ Elements. Under Names. 9 In the View Templates dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Show Type. Click OK. select 3D HVAC Iso. 350 | Chapter 15 Detailing . and click Apply View Template. You hide this duct because it’s not part of the detail being created. Hide elements in a view 10 Select the long rectangular duct at the rear. 12 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel.

label the connecting duct 8x8 Makeup Air to Return Plenum (Provide Motorized Damper). as shown. Move the cursor to the left and click to specify the text insertion point. Click Place Text tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify.14 Place the label: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click on the long rectangular duct to start the leader. and drag the controls to resize the text box as shown. Change text alignment 17 With the text still selected. (Right). 16 Select the text for the 8x8 duct. click Place Text tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ Horizontal: 18 Press Esc. 19 Complete the text labels. 15 Using the same method. Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail | 351 . Enter Makeup Air Duct from AHU-1. Move the cursor down and to the left. and click to specify the second leader point. Typical.

and under Extents. 23 Click on the crop region. select Crop View and clear Crop Region Visible.To rotate and reposition a text label. 24 Access the instance properties for the view. 28 Drag the new isometric view from the Project Browser onto the sheet. Place the view on a sheet 27 In the Project Browser. 26 Zoom to the drawing extents. 25 Click OK. select Crop Region Visible. select the label and use the Drag and Rotate controls that display. open Sheets (all) ➤ M601-HVAC DUCT PLAN & SECTIONS. Modify the view 20 In the drawing area. 352 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 22 Zoom out so that the isometric detail and the crop region are both visible. and use the drag controls to position the boundaries around the detail. and then click OK. under Extents. as shown. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. type VP to open the instance properties for the view.

29 In the drawing area. Work with a filled region that represents a detail component. 2 In the New Drafting View dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Name. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. select the isometric view. you can more accurately locate the view in the Project Browser hierarchy. right-click the view name. select 3" = 1'-0". and then select Viewport Square from the Type Selector drop-down. Annotate the drafting view using keynotes and text notes. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. Drafting Detail Components | 353 . By defining a Sub-Discipline and a View Classification. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_04_i. 30 Close the file with or without saving it. Use detail lines to create a detail group. For Scale. The new view is listed in the Project Browser under Views (Discipline) ➤ ??? ➤ ??? ➤ Drafting Views (Detail). enter Typical Floor Drain Detail. click Training Files. 3 In the Project Browser. Place a detail component. and click Properties. Click OK. you: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Create a drafting view. Create a drafting view 1 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Drafting View. Drafting Detail Components In this exercise.

for Sub-Discipline. 11 Click Create Filled Region Boundary tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ (Rectangle). 7 Click in the middle of the drawing area to place the component. select Plumbing. 9 Zoom in to the component. 8 Click Place Detail Component tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. Place a floor drain detail component 5 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Component drop-down ➤ Detail Component. 12 On the Element panel. select Documentation. 14 Drag the cursor down and to the left so that the rectangle is 1' 8" x 5 1/2". Click OK. click the point at the top of the drain. as the rectangle start point.4 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Graphics. 13 In the drawing area. 6 Click Place Detail Component tab ➤ Element panel. Notice the new location of the view in the Project Browser. 354 | Chapter 15 Detailing . Use a filled region to create a concrete slab 10 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Region drop-down ➤ Region. For View Classification. as shown. select Medium Lines from the Line Style drop-down. and select Floor Drain with Waterproofing-Section from the Type Selector drop-down.

24 Click Modify Detail Items tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Edit Boundary. select the filled region. 16 In the Instance Properties dialog. 17 Click Create Filled Region Boundary tab ➤ Region panel ➤ Finish Region. 23 In the drawing area. for Type. click to select the indicated points in succession from left to right to define the new boundary.15 Click Create Filled Region Boundary tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Region Properties. 25 Click Modify Detail Items > Edit Boundary tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ 26 Zoom to the lower left corner of the filled region. 20 Select 1. Drafting Detail Components | 355 . select C. click the bottom left corner of the filled region to specify the group insertion point. click Modify Detail Items tab ➤ Arrange ➤ Send to Back drop-down ➤ Send to Back. 27 Using the following illustration as a guide. Modify the boundary of the filled region You edit the boundary of the concrete slab so that it matches the contour of the metal deck. 18 With the filled region still selected. and click OK.P. Concrete.5 NR 18 from the Type Selector drop-down. Add a structural metal deck detail group 19 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Group drop-down ➤ Place Detail Group. (Line). and then press Esc.I. 21 In the drawing area. 22 Click Modify.

31 On the Options Bar. 356 | Chapter 15 Detailing . press Tab to highlight the chain of lines. 34 Press Esc. and then click to select them.28 Click Modify. 29 Highlight one of the lines you just drew. and then click point 6 as the endpoint. 32 Click point 1 to specify it as the start point. 30 Click Modify Detail Items > Edit Boundary tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. and then select the base of the slab to the right of the line. 36 Click Modify Detail Items > Edit Boundary tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Trim. 37 Select the small vertical line you just drew. 33 Click the endpoint of the copied chain as the start point for the next chain. 35 Draw a line from the end of the last copied boundary line down to the base of the slab. select Multiple.

40 Click Finish Region. and then press Esc. 45 Using the method learned previously. Drafting Detail Components | 357 . 41 Type ZF to zoom out. as shown. Create a floor component 42 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. (Rectangle). draw a rectangle on top of the filled region.38 Pan to the other end of the slab. and then select the side of the slab above the line. The boundary of the slab now matches the contour of the metal deck. 39 Select the line between points 1 and 2. 44 Click Place Detail Lines tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ This represents the vinyl composition flooring. 43 Select Medium Lines from the Line Style drop-down.

47 Select Wide Lines from the Line Style drop-down. 54 Drag the origin point so that it snaps to the right endpoint of the detail lines. enter Flashing Membrane_F. 51 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Group. as shown. Modify the group origin point 53 In the drawing area. for Name. select the Flashing Membrane group. draw wide detail lines as shown. 358 | Chapter 15 Detailing . press Tab to highlight the chain..D.Create a detail group 46 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. 52 In the Create Group dialog. 50 Highlight one of the wide lines. and click OK. 48 Using the existing thin line as a guide. Notice that the origin point of the group is at the center. 49 Click Modify. and then click to select them.

55 Press Esc. 57 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Component drop-down ➤ Detail Component. add a breakline at the midpoint of the slab’s left edge. as shown. Drafting Detail Components | 359 . 61 Using the same method. 58 Select Break Line from the Type Selector drop-down. 60 Click the midpoint of the drain to specify the breakline location. Add breaklines 56 Type ZO to zoom out. 59 Press Spacebar 3 times to orient the component correctly.

70 In the Keynotes dialog. 69 Click twice to place the leader as shown.A1 Floor Drain W/O Waterproofing. 65 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Keynote drop-down ➤ User.62 Press Esc twice. Modify breakline boundaries 63 Select the left breakline. and use the grips to resize the masking region. select Division 22 ➤ 22 13 00 ➤ 22 13 16 ➤ 22 13 16. 71 Click Modify. select Leader and Free End. 67 On the Options Bar. and then click OK. select the keynote and drag the text to the right. as shown. 64 Press Esc twice. 68 Select the top of the drain as the object to tag. Add a keynote You begin annotating the detail components by adding a keynote for the floor drain object. 66 Select Keynote Text from the Type Selector drop-down. 72 If necessary. 360 | Chapter 15 Detailing .

78 Move the cursor to the left. and use the drag controls to resize and move the text box as shown. and then click anywhere in the view to finish editing. and click to specify the text insertion point. 74 Click Place Text tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ Two Segments. 73 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. 80 Press Esc twice. 77 Move the cursor up and to the left. 79 Enter Adjustable Nickel Bronze Strainer with 4” Flange. 75 Click Place Text tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ (Right). click in the area indicated by the left arrow in the following image.Add text notes You add text notes to continue annotating the view. and click to specify the second leader point. 76 To select the leader start point. 81 Select the text note. Drafting Detail Components | 361 .

83 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimension panel ➤ Aligned. 362 | Chapter 15 Detailing . Add dimensions You add a dimension with multiple references.82 Continue annotating the detail. click to select the slab lines in the order indicated. 84 Using the following image as a guide. as shown.

88 In the drawing area. and then press Esc twice. 90 Press Esc. and click to place it. Drafting Detail Components | 363 . Place the detail on a sheet 86 In the Project Browser.Plumbing Part Plans & Details. select the view title. 91 Close the file with or without saving it. open P103 . 89 Select Viewport Square from the Type Selector drop-down. 87 Drag Typical Floor Drain Detail from the Project Browser to the top center of the sheet.85 Click to the left of the slab to place the dimension line.

rvt. 2 Click Insert tab ➤ Import panel ➤ Import CAD. and select Roof Drain Overflow Imperial. For A-----NPP. Import a CAD detail drawing 1 In the Project Browser. click Training Files. you import a CAD detail drawing. double-click Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ Plumbing ➤ Drafting Views (Detail) ➤ Roof Drain Overflow Detail to make it the active view. 364 | Chapter 15 Detailing . For Layers. 7 On the Imported Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Category. select 3. expand Roof Drains Overflow Imperial. and modify line weight properties in the imported drawing. 6 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Object Styles. Click Open. select Black and White. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Click OK. ■ ■ ■ ■ 4 Type ZF to zoom the view. for Line Weight.dwg. select Visible. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. select Auto-Detect. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_05_i. 3 In the Import CAD Formats dialog: ■ Navigate to Training\Imperial\06_Construction Documentation. For Colors. Modify the CAD drawing line weight 5 Zoom to the left side of the detail.Importing a CAD Drawing In this exercise. For Import units.

Place the detail on a sheet 9 In the Project Browser. open P103 . 13 Click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel. 14 Drag the title to the small space below the viewport. Importing a CAD Drawing | 365 .8 Type ZF. and then press Esc. 11 Press Esc. and select Viewport Square from the Type Selector drop-down. 12 In the drawing area.Plumbing Part Plans & Details. 10 Drag Roof Drain Overflow Detail from the Project Browser to the upper right of the sheet. 15 Close the file with or without saving it. select the viewport title.

366 .

Sign up to vote on this title
UsefulNot useful